JP2020072854A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine excellent in operation of a movable member.SOLUTION: A transmission member 640 which transmits a driving force of a first driving device 630 to a performance member 620 and rises the performance member 620 is pivotally supported by a second axis support hole 614 of a base member 610 and joined to the performance member 620, and a length from a joint position of the performance member 620 and the transmission member 640 to the second axis support hole 614 is formed shorter in comparison with a length from a joint position of the performance member 620 and the transmission member 640 to the second axis support hole 614. Thus, even when the performance member 620 is long in a radial direction of the second axis support hole 614, it is possible to suppress a travel amount of a center of gravity of the performance member 620 in the case that the first driving device 630 is operated by a minimum unit of resolution of control by the first driving device 630.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 53

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that drives a movable member that is displaceably supported by a supporting portion formed on a base member and moves upward from a predetermined position by transmission of driving force by a gear (Patent Document 1). ..

JP, 2011-120640, A

  However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the operation of the movable member.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the operation of the movable member is good.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member, and moves upward from a predetermined position, and the movable member. In a gaming machine including a driving device that generates a driving force to displace, and a transmission member that is connected to the movable member and that transmits the driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member, the transmission member is the base. Compared to the length from the support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member, the shaft support portion formed on the member swingably supports the movable member and the transmission member. The length to the connecting position is short.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the transmission member extends from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Arm length is reduced.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the movable member includes a protrusion that protrudes in a direction parallel to the support portion, and the transmission member includes the shaft. A long hole extending in the radial direction of the support portion is provided with an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operation of the movable member can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operation of the movable member can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 1 or 2, it is possible to stabilize the operation of the movable member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board and a board lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board lower part unit. (A) is a front view of a base member, a 1st out mouth, a 2nd out mouth, a lower left board member, and a lower right board member, (b) is a base member in the XVb-XVb line of Drawing 15 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a lower left plate member. It is a front perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front view of a vertical movement unit. It is a front view of a vertical movement unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an expansion-contraction effect device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction production device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line of the protrusion. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a tilt operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an effect member and a second drive device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the swing angle of the production | generation member with respect to the swing angle of a transmission member. It is a front view of a tilt operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front view of a tilt operation unit and a slide operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and the torsion spring in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and the torsion spring in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a rear perspective view of the transmission member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a rear perspective view of a moving contact member. (A) And (b) is a rear perspective view of a transmission member, (c) and (d) are top views of a transmission member. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the main body member of the effect member typically. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a front view of the compound action unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a partial front view of the rotating arm member in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a partial top view of the rotating arm member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIXb in (a) of FIG. 69, (c) 8] is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a switching device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound motion unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the tilting motion unit in 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (gaming ball) flows down in front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, or the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, a general prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the front surface side of the base plate 60 on the rear surface side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. Further, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the board lower unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. While being attenuated, it is bounced back toward the center.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while on the other hand, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync, by the lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device indicates a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  The "high probability state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) in the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probable change or during the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is generated by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") which performs variable display, and an LED which variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditors product 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

  In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big hit, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, toward the second winning port 640, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64, and a first specific winning port 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. A second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the variable display device 80, and a second circular winning device 63, 64, 640 having a circular shape having the same size as the other winning holes 63, 64, 640 is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop pattern and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a which are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b (for opening and closing rightward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). 15 (only the outer shape is shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the closed state and the closed state of are alternately repeated.

  Specifically, the second variable winning a prize device 650 is for opening and closing the triangular opening and closing plate in front view, which is arranged to the left of the second specific winning port 650a, and driving the opening and closing to the left with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. And a large opening solenoid (not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the left, and temporarily forms an open state in which the ball easily wins the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the state.

  In the present embodiment, since it is possible to win a ball in the second variable winning device 650 by performing a left-handed stroke, it is possible to eliminate the trouble of switching between a left-handed stroke and a right-handed stroke each time the game state changes. can do.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided with a large opening which is opened and closed separately in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is lit, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a in response to the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a, 650a during a predetermined time, You may make it the game state opened a predetermined number of times as a special game state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, It is not limited to the left side of the variable display device 80, but may be below the first winning opening 64, for example.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 314 and a second outlet 315. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 314 or the second out opening 315, not shown. You will be guided to the road. The first outlet 314 is arranged on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, while the second outlet 315 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64. That is, the second outlet 315 is arranged on the opposite side of the first outlet 314 with the first winning opening 64 interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 2) from the first winning opening 64 is the inner rail 61. Or, it flows down along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second outlet port 315, while being on the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side in front view with respect to the first winning port 64. The reached ball is made to flow down along the inclination (curve) of the inner rail 61, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (fire control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device, by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmitting / receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the payout control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open / close and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 431, 466, 531, 561, 631, 661, 751.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear surface image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear surface image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a housing structure of the respective units 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operating unit 200 when the exploded operating unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates the combined operation unit 500 mounted on the rear case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, in the operation unit 200, one surface side (front side in FIG. 6) is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. The rear case 210 is formed in a box shape. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211 a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  The operation unit 200 accommodates the vertical operation unit 400, the combined operation unit 500, the tilting operation unit 600, and the slide operation unit 700 in the internal space of the rear case 210, and is configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the combined operation unit 500 is disposed in the upper right portion of the area formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged below the region formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210. Further, in contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the vertical operation unit 400 is arranged on the front side of the composite operation unit 500 in a stacked and stacked state and accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the other operation unit (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) is arranged in a stacked state in which the predetermined operation unit (for example, the composite operation unit 500) and the other operation unit (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) are superposed on the front side. Therefore, the predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in the front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light transmissive material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, a predetermined operation unit is provided. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary portion of the above, and to shield the other portion from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved. ..

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the vertical operation unit 400, the combined operation unit 500, the tilting operation unit 600, and the slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 are referred to as appropriate.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. It should be noted that in FIG. 8, the state in which the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged in the projecting position is shown, and in FIG. 9, the expansion / contraction producing device 540 (see FIG. 26) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state. The formed state is shown in FIG. 10 in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged substantially at the center in the width direction.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical movement unit 400 operates the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). ) Is placed.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the combined operation unit 500, the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) is arranged in the projecting position in which it projects downward, and the front plate member 546 is located at the center of the opening 211 a of the rear case 210 (that is, The front side of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2), and the extended state where the rotating arm member 550 is retracted upward, and the front plate member 546 is located at the opening 211a of the rear case 210. A reduced state (see FIG. 5) retracted upward can be formed. In the contracted state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the tilting operation unit 600, the supporting member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the sliding operation unit 700 is slid to the left and right, so that the retracted position shown in FIG. It is movable to and from the position. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting movement unit 600 is retracted to the outside right of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is visually recognized by the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  Note that FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened and the internal liquid crystal device is visually recognized. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) visually recognized through the opening 211a and the liquid crystal device inside the tilting operation unit 600. It is possible for the player to visually recognize both of the effects displayed in.

  Each of these operation units 400 to 700 is formed so as to be independently operable and, as described above, is arranged in a stacked (stacked) state. In the case where the layers are arranged in different layers, the operation members can be simultaneously operated even if they are in a mode of projecting inwardly of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, not only each of the operation units 400 to 700 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. Note that, in FIG. 11, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in an expanded state, the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400 are arranged at the projecting position, and the door member 470 is provided. Are opened.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the front plate member 546 of the combined operation unit 500 is visually recognized through the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400. Since the lens member 460 is formed with a magnifying lens as described later, the front plate member 546 is magnified.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 11, the rotary plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the combined operation unit 500 is swung about the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved up and down. When the front plate member 546 is moved to a position (see FIG. 39) away from the lens member 470 of FIG. As a result, it is possible to switch between a state in which the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size and a state in which the front plate member 546 is magnified (see FIG. 11), and it is possible to improve the effect.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state, the tilting operation unit 600 is in the retracted position and is in the tilted state, and the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are shown. The state just before and abutting is illustrated. By further tilting the tilting operation unit 600, the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the complex motion unit 500 clockwise in the front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to perform an effect as if the tilt motion unit 600 exerts a force on the complex motion unit 500. (It is possible to correlate the movements of the units with each other to perform more complex effects). Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Next, the board lower unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface 13 and the board surface lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 13, in the lower part of the game board 13, a receiving opening 13a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and the board lower part unit 300 is inserted.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the board lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 14, the board surface lower unit 300 includes a base member 310 which is fitted and fixed in the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13, and a ball which is arranged at the lower left of the base member 310 in a front view and has a first out port. A lower left plate member 320 that guides to 314, a lower right plate member 330 that is disposed on the lower right side of the base member 310 in a front view and that guides the ball to the second out port 315, and a lower left plate that is fastened and fixed to the base member 310 from the front side. The member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 mainly include a front lid member 340 pivotally supported by an insertion shaft 343.

  The base member 310 has a plate-shaped main body portion 311 formed in a cross-sectional shape slightly smaller than the shape of the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and slightly smaller than the receiving opening 13a, and the front side of the main body portion 311. A decorative front plate portion 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, a movable effect member 313 attached to a substantially central portion in the width direction of the decorative front plate portion 312, and a movable effect member 313 formed on the left side in a front view. Mainly includes a first out opening 314 that is a rectangular hole and a second out opening 315 that is a rectangular hole formed to the right of the movable effect member 313 in a front view.

  The movable effect member 313 includes a rotation effect member 313a which is arranged at the lower center edge of the game board 13 in the width direction and is rotated by a drive device (not shown). Here, when the outlet is arranged at the lower edge of the width direction center of the game board 13, the movable effect member 313 cannot be arranged at the lower edge of the width direction center of the game board 13. In the present embodiment, the out port is not provided at the lower edge of the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, and the first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are provided at positions left and right from the center of the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to secure a space for disposing the movable effect member 313 on the lower edge of the center of the game board 13 in the width direction.

  The shapes of the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. FIG. 15A is a front view of the base member 310, the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the base member 310 and the lower left plate member 320 taken along line XVb-XVb in FIG. Note that FIG. 15A illustrates the outer shape of the front lid member 340 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 310, and the nails formed above the first out port 314 and the second out port 315.

  The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. The second out port 315 has a shorter formation length in the width direction than the first out port 314. The reason will be described later. In addition, a guide rib 315a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner surface of the second outlet 315. The guide rib 315a makes it possible to suppress the resistance applied to the sphere when the sphere flowing into the second out port 315 hits high and collides with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315. Further, the flow of the balls discharged from the second outlet 315 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, and variation in the direction of the discharged balls can be suppressed.

  Further, the buffer ribs 322 of the lower left plate member 320 described later are formed higher toward the center of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) in the width direction (see FIG. 15A). Thereby, even in the present embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area increases toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the effect of suppressing the rebound of the ball falling on the lower left plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the higher the drop height of the ball, so there is a possibility that the impact when the dropped ball collides with the lower left plate member 320 will increase. On the other hand, since the buffer ribs 322 are formed higher toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the buffer ribs 322 are bent closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, thereby cushioning the impact of the fall. The degree can be increased.

  Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling balls will be described. For example, when a ball landing on the cushioning ribs 322 and 332 has a high drop height, but the frequency at which the ball reaches the position is extremely low, even if the bounce of the ball is not suppressed, the discharge of another ball is obstructed. It may not be. Even in this case, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is increased, the space in the game area is unnecessarily suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the cushioning ribs 322 and 332 is set not only in the drop height of the ball but also in the relationship between the drop height and the frequency of landing of the ball at that position.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the spheres flowing down above the cushioning ribs 322 and 332 are started to flow down on the paths c1 and c2, and then reach the landing areas z0 to z4 via a plurality of branches b1 to b10. In the following description, the probability that a ball will flow down is equal on routes c1 and c2 (1/2), and the probabilities of branching left and right on branches b1 to b10 are equal on both sides (1/2). Will be explained. It is assumed that the sphere will not flow down from the upper right.

  The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z0 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 to reach the route c11. It is considered that the branch b5 is reached from the route c1 via the branch b1 and is reached from the route c2. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z0 when it reaches the route c11 is 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2), which is the probability of the ball flowing down from the route c1. It is 3/8 because it is represented by the sum of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the route c2 and 1/4 (= 1/2 × 1/2) (“^” means exponentiation). That is, the respective probabilities are the product of 1/2 the probability that the sphere will flow down the routes c1 and c2, and the number that is raised to the power of 1/2 by the number of branches b1 to b10 through which the sphere will pass before reaching the landing area z0. It is represented by.

  The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z1 will be described. To reach the landing area z1, the branch b3 flows down the left side to reach the route c15, the branch b4 flows down the left side to reach the route c16, or the branch b6 flows down the right side to reach the route c14. It is necessary to reach the route c13 or to flow down the right side at the branch b7 to reach the route c13.

  Up to the branch b3, only when the sphere flows down from the route c1 is considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the route c15, the probability that the sphere will reach the route c15 is 1/16 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3). Further, up to the branch b4, only when the sphere flows down from the route c1 is considered, and since there are four branches before the sphere reaches the route c16, the probability that the sphere reaches the route c16 is 1/32. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 4). Further, up to the branch b6, only when the sphere flows down from the route c1 is considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the route c14, the probability that the sphere will reach the route c14 is 1/16. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3).

  Up to the branch b7, both cases where spheres flow down from the path c1 and the path c2 are conceivable, and there are four branches before the sphere that flows down from the path c1 reaches the path c13, and three branches. May exist. There are two branches before the sphere flowing down from the route c2 reaches the route c13. Therefore, the probability of the sphere reaching the route c13 is 3/32 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 4 + 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 3), which is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the route c1. It is 7/32 because it is represented by the sum of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the route c2 and 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2).

  Here, the probability that the ball will reach the landing area z1 is 12/32 because it is the sum of the probabilities that the ball will reach the routes c13 to c16 described above.

  The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z2 can be represented by the probability that the sphere will reach the route c12, which is equal to the probability that the sphere that has reached the branch b7 will reach the route c13. Therefore, the probability that the ball will reach the landing area z2 is 7/32.

  The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the route c17 or down the left side at the branch b10 to reach the route c18.

  Up to the branch b9, only when the sphere flows down from the route c1 is considered, and there are six branches before the sphere reaches the route c17. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the route c17 is 1/128 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 6). Further, up to the branch b10, only when the sphere flows down from the route c1 is considered, and since there are seven branches before the sphere reaches the route c18, the probability that the sphere reaches the route c18 is 1/256. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z3 is 3/256 because it is the sum of the probability that the ball will reach the routes c17 and c18 described above.

  The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 to reach the route c19. It should be noted that all the balls flowing down the right side of the branch b10 flow down along the path c19. The probability that the sphere will reach the route c19 is equal to the probability that the sphere that has reached the branch b10 will reach the route c18. Therefore, the probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z4 is 1/256 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  From these, the ratio of the sphere reaching each landing area z0 to z4 is (z0: z1: z2: z3: z4) = (96: 96: 56: 3: 1). This ratio has a correlation with the buffer ribs 322 and 332.

  For example, comparing the landing area z1 and the landing area z3, although the heights of the balls falling on the landing areas z1 and z3 are the same, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is larger in the landing area z3. It is smaller than z1. This is because the ratio of the balls reaching the landing area z3 is 1/32 of the ratio of the balls reaching the landing area z1. That is, even if the bounding of the falling ball is not suppressed to the extent of the landing area z1, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing area z3, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by making the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 smaller than that in the landing area z1.

  For example, comparing the landing area z2 and the landing area z4, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is larger than the distance of the ball falling on the landing area z2, though the distance of the ball falling on the landing area z4 is longer. The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the ratio of the balls reaching the landing area z4 is 1/56 of the ratio of the balls reaching the landing area z2. That is, even if the bounding of the falling ball is not suppressed to the extent of the landing area z2, there is little risk that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing area z4, the disposition position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by making the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 smaller than that in the landing area z2.

  In addition, in the above description, the probability that the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 branch is equal to the left and right (1/2), but by changing the width of the nail, the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 are divided. It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by reducing the distance between the nails in the flow path that the arrow on the left side of the branch b1 passes to as small as the diameter of the sphere, the probability that the sphere will flow down along the arrow on the right side of the branch b1 is greater than 1/2. can do. In the other branches b2 to b10, the probability of sphere branching can be adjusted in the same manner.

  As a result, the frequency with which the balls reach the paths c11 to c19 can be adjusted, and the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

  Further, the buffer rib 322 is formed such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward as it goes rearward (see FIG. 15B). Thereby, the flow of the ball to the first out port 314 can be accelerated.

  It returns to FIG. 14 and demonstrates. The lower left plate member 320 includes a long plate-shaped main body portion 321, a buffer rib 322 in which thin plates that are continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321 extend in the front-rear direction, and the buffer ribs. A front connecting plate 323 formed in a manner of connecting the front surfaces of the main body 322, a step portion 324 formed to bulge upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front, and extending from the step portion 324 to the left when viewed from the front. The ball flow rail portion 325 and a shaft support hole 326 formed in the front-rear direction at the right end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front are mainly provided.

  The cushioning rib 322 is a portion through which a sphere heading for the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses a rebound of the sphere falling in the up-down direction in the up-down direction. That is, since the buffer ribs 322 are formed of thin plates that are continuously provided in the left-right direction, when the ball is collided with a falling ball, it can be deflected in the thickness direction to reduce the impact of the collision. Further, when the ball moves in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the buffer rib 322, the ball is caught between the buffer ribs 322, so that the ball is braked. Further, the buffer rib 322 has a forming height and an aspect ratio that increase toward the right side in the front view (game board 13 (see FIG. 2)) inward in the width direction.

  The front connecting plate 323 improves the strength of the buffer rib 322 by connecting the buffer rib 322.

  The step portion 324 is a raised portion for dropping the sphere that has flowed down from the sphere flow rail portion 325 in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load in the left-right direction from being applied to the buffer rib 322 from the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 325. As a result, the buffer rib 322 can be prevented from being bent in the left-right direction by receiving the load in the left-right direction.

  That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed of a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, it may be broken by a load in the left-right direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a ball rolling on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325, which has a speed in the left-right direction and may load a load in the left-right direction, moves up and down from the step 324 to the buffer rib 322. It is formed so as to drop in the direction. As a result, the position where the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be brought closer to the right in the width direction as the speed of the ball in the left-right direction is higher.

  Therefore, when the ball lands on the cushioning rib 322, the load applied to the cushioning rib 322 in the left-right direction can be made smaller toward the left (outer side) in the width direction. Therefore, as the cushion rib 322 is moved to the left in the width direction, the possibility that the ball is bent due to the load in the left-right direction is reduced, and the aspect ratio of the cushion rib 322 can be formed smaller than that in the right direction of the width. .. In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer rib 322 is arranged as compared with the case where the buffer rib 322 has the same length in the width direction. The position can be lowered.

  Here, with the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 kept constant at the left and right positions in the width direction (with the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 being formed in the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface formed in the above. However, in this case, the disposition position of the step portion 324 becomes high, and the disposition position of the ball flow rail portion 325 formed so as to be inclined downward toward the step portion 324 also becomes high. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) becomes large, and the game area is suppressed.

  On the other hand, the larger the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, the greater the effect of reducing the momentum of the ball (deceleration effect). Therefore, the buffer ribs 322 are formed in such a manner that the aspect ratio increases from the vicinity of the step portion 324 toward the center of the game area.

  The upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the curve of the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 up to the front of the step 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step 324 (in the middle of the horizontal direction of the buffer rib 322). The maximum height is formed). However, in this case, the ball reaching the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling to the left. Therefore, the balls are likely to stay in the landing area z1, and it becomes difficult to smoothly discharge the balls.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 in the width direction of the buffer rib 322 is small, the sphere reaching the landing area z1 easily rolls to the left (the landing area z2 side). Move. Therefore, the balls can be made to flow to the landing area z2 before the balls stay in the landing area z1, so that the balls can be discharged smoothly.

  In addition, the step portion 324 has a function of stopping the ball flowing down above the buffer rib 322 and flowing to the left. This can prevent the ball from bouncing beyond the lateral width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front lid member 340 (see FIG. 13).

  The shaft support hole 326 is a portion where the insertion shaft 343 of the front lid member 340 is inserted and is axially supported.

  The lower right plate member 330 includes a main body 331 having an elongated plate shape, a buffer rib 332 in which thin wall portions continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body 331 extend in the front-rear direction, respectively. A front connecting plate 333 formed in a manner of connecting the front surfaces of the cushioning ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 formed to be recessed downward at the front end right end of the main body 331, and a rightward front view from the recessed portion 324. Mainly includes a ball flow rail portion 335 extending to the front and a shaft supporting hole 336 formed in the front-rear direction at the left end portion of the main body portion 331 in front view.

  The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body 331 is the main body 321, the buffer rib 332 is the buffer rib 322, the front connecting plate 333 is the front connecting plate 323, the ball flow rail 335 is the ball flow rail 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is the shaft. Since the technical idea is the same as that of the support hole 326, the description of the common part will be omitted.

  The buffer rib 332 is formed such that the left and right forming widths thereof are shorter than the buffer rib 322. As a result, the left and right forming widths of the second out port 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward as compared with the first out port 314. It is possible to secure a space for disposing the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 (the disposition position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered).

  Here, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 because the flow path of the ball to the second out port 315 is regulated. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, by arranging the first variable winning a prize device 65 at the upper right of the second outlet 315 when viewed from the front, the ball flows into the first specific winning a prize port 65a when the opening / closing plate is opened, When the opening / closing plate is closed, the ball is dropped vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing into the second outlet 315 from the upper right of the front view. In other words, a non-downflow region in which the downflow of the ball is restricted is formed in the upper right portion of the second out port 315.

  Therefore, the downward flow direction of the sphere to the lower right plate member 330 is limited only to the vertical drop and the downward flow from the width direction (from the spherical flow rail portion 335) (the downward flow from the diagonally upper right is restricted). .. Therefore, since there is no inflow of the ball from diagonally upper right, the direction in which the ball bounces can be limited, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be narrowed, and the formation width of the second out port 315 can be narrowed. As a result, a space for disposing the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

  The recessed portion 334 is a recess for bouncing the sphere flowing down the sphere flow rail portion 335. Therefore, the formation width of the recessed portion 334 is set to a width on which the sphere can be placed without coming into contact with the adjacent cushioning rib 332.

  The sphere that has flowed down the sphere flow rail portion 335 is dropped into the recessed portion 334, abuts on the upper surface of the recessed portion 334, bounces, and then drops onto the buffer rib 332. As a result, it is possible to prevent the buffer rib 332 from being loaded with a load in the width direction and prevent the buffer rib 332 from being broken.

  The recessed portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 is inserted. This makes it easier to use a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing the fastening screw into the fastening hole B to fasten and fix the board lower unit 300 to the game board 13. That is, the recessed portion 334 has both the effect of preventing the buffer rib 332 from being broken and the effect of facilitating the fastening and fixing of the base member 310.

  The front lid member 340 has a plate-shaped main body 341 in which the first winning opening 64 is formed in the uppermost portion, and an opening 342 formed in the center of the main body 341 to allow the rotation effect member 313a to be visually recognized. A pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336 are mainly provided.

  The main body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the side wall portion limits the downward flow direction of the sphere. That is, a ball that collides with the body 341 from the right side cannot penetrate to the left, while a ball that collides with the body 341 from the left cannot penetrate to the right.

  The insertion shaft 343 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336. Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is formed to be slightly smaller than that of the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

  Next, the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. 16 and 17, the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is shown in the retracted position.

  18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical movement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that includes a vertical groove portion 414 that is recessed on the right side when viewed from the rear side from the rear surface side to the front surface side and that recess is extended in the vertical direction. A rotary crank member 420 rotated around the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, a drive device 430 for generating a driving force of the rotary crank member 420, and a driving force transmitted from the rotary crank member 420 to the base member 410. The arm member 440 that is swung about the shaft portion 412 of the base member 410 is disposed on the opposite side of the vertical groove portion 414 of the base member 410 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440. The slide member 450 and a slide hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440 are suspended in the vertical direction in association with the swing of the arm member 440. A lens member 460 is slidably formed mainly includes a pair of door member 470 which is respectively pivotally supported on the lens member 460, a.

  The base member 410 includes a main body 411 formed in the shape of a long plate on the left and right, and a cylindrical support hole 442 of the arm member 440 that is provided in a cylindrical shape from the right end of the main body 411 toward the front side. A shaft portion 412 that is supported, a connecting hole 413 that is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction, and that connects the rotary crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and is formed from the rear surface side to the front surface side of the main body portion 411 on the right side in rear view. It mainly includes an upper and lower groove portion 414 in which the recessed portion extends in the vertical direction, and a recessed portion 415 that is recessed from the front surface to the rear surface side on both the left and right outer sides of the vertical groove portion 414.

  The upper and lower groove portions 414 are portions where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 of the combined operation unit 500 is accommodated on the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, in the combined operation unit 500, the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is suppressed as the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves toward the contracted state, so that the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is rocked to cause the vertical groove portion 414 to move. Collisions against the left and right inner surfaces are prevented. The recessed portion 415 is a portion to which the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

  The rotary crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 421, and a sliding protrusion portion 422 that is provided in a cylindrical shape on the front side from one end portion of the main body portion 421 and is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440. An engaging portion 423 that is engaged with the fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 and that disables relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 is mainly provided.

  When the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotated, the driving force of the drive device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440, and the arm member 440 is swung about the shaft portion 412. ..

  The drive device 430 includes a drive motor 431 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a drive gear 431 a that is rotationally driven by the drive motor 431, a transmission gear 432 that meshes with the drive gear 431 a, and a transmission gear 432. Mainly includes a fitting portion 432a which is formed on the front side with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting hole 413 and whose inner side surface is fitted to the engaging portion 423 of the rotary crank member 420.

  The fitting portion 432a is a portion having a recess having a cross-sectional shape in which a circular shape is arranged at each vertex of a triangle, is inserted into the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, and the rotary crank member 420 is provided on the tip side thereof. The engaging portion 423 of is fitted such that it cannot rotate relative to the other. As a result, the main body 411 of the base member 410 is formed in such a manner that the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 sandwich the plate, and as described above, the relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 is disabled. The transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 rotate in synchronization with each other. That is, the driving force of the drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotary crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432.

  The arm member 440 includes a main body 441 formed in the shape of a long rod, a shaft support hole 442 formed in the base end side (right side in front view) and pivotally supported by the shaft portion 412, and a base end side. The sliding hole 443, which is formed as a long hole on the swinging end side which is the end on the opposite side of the above, into which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the sliding protrusion 422 of the rotary crank member 420 are inserted. And a bottomed hole-shaped insertion portion 444 that is formed.

  The shape of the insertion portion 444 is set so that the rotary crank member 420 can make one rotation while the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444. Therefore, the arm member 440 can perform the swinging motion regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 420.

  The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 451, a slide guide portion 452 extending rearward from both left and right end portions of the main body portion 451, and guided in a recessed portion 415 so as to be vertically slidable. A central guide recessed portion 453, which is a recess formed in the front in the widthwise central portion of the lens 451 and extending in the vertical direction, and through which the sliding protrusion portion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and both left and right ends of the main body portion 451. Mainly provided with a both-end guide recessed portion 454 which is a recess formed in the front surface of the portion and extending in the up-down direction and which guides the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460.

  The lens member 460 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 461 having a circular opening formed in the center, a magnifying lens 462 formed with a magnifying lens process fitted into the opening of the main body portion 461, and a widthwise center of the main body portion 461. Sliding projections 463 projecting to the rear side at the upper end and inserted in the sliding holes 443 of the arm member 440 so as to be vertically slidable, and sliding projections 463 projecting to the rear side at both widthwise ends of the main body 461. A stable slide portion 464 that is vertically slidably inserted into both end guide recessed portions 454 of the member 450, and a lower shaft portion 473 and an upper portion of the door member 470 that are axially rotatably disposed to the lower left of the main body portion 461 in a front view. Mainly provided are a pair of rotary cylinders 465 through which the shaft portions 474 are inserted, and a drive motor 466 for rotating the pair of rotary cylinders 465 in mutually opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown). That.

  The movement operation of the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. Note that FIG. 20 illustrates a closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

  When the arm member 440 is swung from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the extended position (see FIG. 20), the lens member 460 that is pivotally supported by the sliding hole 443 on the swing end side of the arm member 440 slides. The moving protrusion 463 (see FIG. 18) is slid in the central guide recess 453 of the slide member 450. The lens member 460 is vertically guided by the both end guide concave portions 454 of the slide member 450, and the slide member 450 is vertically guided by the concave portion 415 of the base member 410. The member 460 is slid in the vertical direction.

  It returns to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 and demonstrates. The door member 470 is configured by dividing a circular plate into upper and lower parts, a lower main body 471 formed on the lower side, an upper main body 472 formed on the upper side of the lower main body 471, and a lower side. A lower shaft portion 473 projecting cylindrically on the back side at the lower end portion of the main body portion 471 and inserted into the rotation cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as to be relatively non-rotatable, and a lower side circular portion on the back surface side at the lower end portion of the upper body portion 472. An upper shaft portion 474, which is provided in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotation cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as to be relatively non-rotatable, is mainly provided.

  The lower main body 471 includes a guide protrusion 471 a that is provided on a side surface of the side that contacts the upper main body 472, and the upper main body 472 has a side surface that contacts the lower main body 471. And a receiving recessed portion 472a recessed in. By fitting the guide protrusion 471a and the receiving recessed portion 472a, relative positioning between the lower body 471 and the upper body 472 in the closed state can be performed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the guide protrusion 471a is provided so as to project in a tapered shape, the guide protrusion 471a can be reliably fitted into the receiving recess 472a.

  The operation of the door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. It should be noted that FIG. 21 illustrates an open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

  The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by the rotation of the rotary cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. Since the pair of rotary cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), the door member 470 is changed from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). In this case, the lower body 471 and the upper body 472 can be swung outward (opposite directions). Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower body portion 471 and the upper body portion 472 can be swung inward with respect to each other.

  As a result, the time for rocking the lower body 471 and the upper body 472 can be halved compared to the case where the front side of the lens member 460 is covered by rocking a single cover member.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 45. The combined operation unit 500 arranges the expansion / contraction effect device 540 on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the extended position (see FIG. 9). It is a unit. Further, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is formed to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510.

  22 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the combined operation unit 500. 22 and 23 show the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position which is the end position formed outside the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  FIG. 24 is a front exploded perspective view of the combined movement unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of the combined movement unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the composite operation unit 500 is a unit that performs an effect by sliding and swinging the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and includes a base member 510 forming a skeleton and the base member 510. A rotary plate 520 rotatably formed around the first shaft portion 512, a first driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 to generate a driving force of the rotary plate 520, and fastened to the front surface of the rotary plate 520. An expansion / contraction production device 540 that is fixed and is formed to be expandable / contractible in the radial direction of the rotary plate 520, and one end portion is connected to the expansion / contraction production device 540 and the other end portion on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510. In addition, the rotating arm member 550 that forms the expanding and contracting motion of the expanding and contracting device 540 by the swinging motion, and the driving force of the rotating arm member 550 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510. The second drive device 560 to be generated, the rotary crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the second drive device 560 to the rotary arm member 550, the rotary arm member 550 that is fastened and fixed from the front of the base member 510, and the rotary arm member 550. A front cover 580 mainly for blinding the crankshaft 570 and other mechanical parts on the rotating shaft side is provided.

  The base member 510 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 511, a cylindrical first shaft portion 512 projecting forward from a substantially lower center in the width direction of the main body portion 511, and the first shaft portion 512. Three rows of arc-shaped holes 513 drilled along the center arc, and first through holes 514 drilled adjacent to the second arc-shaped holes 513b of the three rows of arc-shaped holes 513. And a columnar second shaft portion 515 protruding forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511, and adjacent to the second shaft portion 515. The second through hole 516 to be bored, the cylindrical third shaft portion 517 protruding forward from the lower right end of the main body portion 511 in a front view, and the frontward bent portion formed from the edge of the main body portion 511. The bent wall portion 518 is mainly provided.

  The first shaft portion 512 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520 and serves as a rotating shaft of the rotating plate 520. Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotary plate 520.

  The arcuate hole 513 includes a first arcuate hole 513a, a second arcuate hole 513b, and a third arcuate hole 513c from the side close to the first shaft portion 512.

  The first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are long holes into which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotary plate 520 is inserted and which guide the rotation of the rotary plate 520. As a result, the load applied to the first shaft portion 512 when the rotating plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. 24 and 25 show a state in which the collar is fastened to the distal end of the insertion shaft 525, the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c connect the collar and the main body 521. Placed between them (inserted before fastening the collar).

  The second arc-shaped hole 513b is a long hole in which the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 is arranged and moved. The upper side of the substantially central portion is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 is arranged in the opened portion. Accordingly, the meshing portion of the drive motor 531 of the first driving device 530 and the arcuate rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 can be arranged in the plate thickness portion of the main body portion 511, and thus the thickness of the composite operation unit 500 can be increased. The size in the depth direction (size in the front-back direction in FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

  The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes into which the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 and the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 are inserted, respectively.

  The second shaft portion 515 is a columnar portion to which the lid portion 575 of the rotating crank member 570 is fastened and fixed on the front side and serves as a central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571. Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 of the rotating crank member 570.

  The third shaft portion 517 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 and serves as a central axis of rotation of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550. Around the third shaft portion 517, a torsion spring 517a that generates a biasing force that moves the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position is wound.

  The torsion spring 517a is formed in such a manner that arms are respectively extended from both ends of a coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517. One arm is fixed to the lower right portion of the folding wall 518 in the front view (near the first stopper 518a), and the other arm opposite to the one arm is engaged with the rotary arm member 550. It is locked to the stopper 555.

  The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed on the right side of the first shaft portion 512, and a left side portion of the first shaft portion 512. And a third stopper portion 518c formed in.

  The first stopper portion 518a is a portion that restricts rotation of the rotation arm member 550. That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the extended position (see FIG. 9), it is brought into contact with the first stopper portion 518a and the lowering is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is arranged below the third stopper portion 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotary plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotary plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the rotation direction toward the second stopper portion 512b. You can That is, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 described later is formed such that the maximum angle of the clockwise swing in the front view is larger than the maximum angle of the counterclockwise swing in the front view.

  The rotating plate 520 includes a fan-shaped plate-shaped main body portion 521, a shaft support hole 522 formed in a circular shape in a thickness direction at a root portion of the main body portion 521, and a body having a width slightly larger than an inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 linearly recessed on the front surface of the portion 521, a pair of expansion and contraction stoppers 524 formed on both sides of the lower end portion of the rail receiving groove 523, and protruding from the rear surface of the main body portion 521. A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) insertion shafts 525, and an arcuate rack projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 521 in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 522 and having gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral portion. 526 is mainly provided.

  The first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is inserted into the shaft support hole 522. Therefore, the rotary plate 520 is swung around the first shaft portion 512.

  The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion to which the slide rail 545 of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 is fastened and fixed, and the expansion / contraction producing device 540 expands / contracts along the extending direction of the rail receiving groove 523. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 changes depending on the posture of the rotating plate 520.

  The expansion / contraction stopper 524 is a portion that abuts on the inner side surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 in the vertical direction and restricts the movement width of the slide plate 544. By being formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523 and contacting the inner side surfaces of the slide plate 544 on both sides thereof, it is possible to prevent the slide rail 545 from receiving a load in the direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction and improve the durability. Can be planned.

  The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted into the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c of the base member 510 and guides the rotation of the rotating plate 520, and has a diameter of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third circle. It is formed to be slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arcuate hole 513c. In addition, a collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c is fastened and fixed to the tip, so that the rotary plate 520 is irremovably connected to the base member 510.

  The arcuate rack 526 is inserted into the second arcuate hole 513b of the base member 510 and meshes with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530. Since the meshing portion between the arcuate rack 526 and the first drive device 530 is formed in a region including the thickness portion of the base member 510, the dimension of the combined operation unit 500 in the thickness direction can be suppressed.

  The first drive device 530 mainly includes a drive motor 531 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510, and a drive gear 532 that is inserted into the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and that is axially rotated by the drive motor 531.

  Next, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the stretch effect device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the stretch effect device 540.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 includes a main body member 541 that forms a skeleton and a main body of the rotating arm member 550 between the main body member 541 and a pair of the main body member 541. The first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted, and the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are axially slidable along the extending direction of the insertion holes 542d and 543d. A slide plate 544 that is connected to the slide plate 544 and a slide plate 545 that connects the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520 and one end of which is fitted into the rail receiving groove 523 and fastened and fixed, and is raised to the front side of the main body member 541. The front plate member 546, which is fastened and fixed, the connecting slide member 547 slidably supported by the shaft supporting portion 546c of the front plate member 546, and the connecting slide member 547. Mainly includes a decorative member 548 front drooping portion 548b is formed to be movable in the front of the body member 541 is fixed.

  The main body member 541 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 541a forming a skeleton, a cylindrical projection portion 541b protruding toward the rear surface side in the widthwise central portion of the main body portion 541a, and a rear surface of the projection portion 541b. A pair of upper and lower fastening parts 541c projecting upward and downward on the left side of the body, a second pair of fastening parts 541d protruding vertically on the right side of the projecting part 541b in the rear view, and an upper left portion of the body part 541a in the rear view. It mainly includes a guide fastening portion 541e that is provided in a protruding manner, and a fastening hole 541f that is formed in a plurality (three places in the present embodiment) on the front side of the main body portion 541a and that fastens and fixes the front plate member 546.

  The protruding portion 541b is a portion that is inserted into the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the protrusion 541b is formed to be slightly smaller than the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the arc-shaped hole 554. Further, since the protrusion 541b is inserted into the arcuate hole 554, when the rotating arm member 550 is swung, the main body member 541 can be interlocked.

  The first raised fastening portion 541c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. The reason why the second lift-up fastening portion 541d is longer in the vertical direction than the first lift-up fastening portion 541c is that the second lift-up fastening portion 541d is disposed at a position where it does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550. Here, in the present embodiment, the rotating arm member does not pass through the lower left part of the main body member 541 in the front view in the rotating locus (see FIGS. 37, 40 and 44). Therefore, it is possible to widen the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541d compared to the first raised fastening portions 541c, and it is possible to improve the rigidity of the second raised fastening portions 541d.

  The guide fastening portion 541e is a portion to which the auxiliary fastening portion 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and is a portion to which the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided when the expansion / contraction producing device 540 is in the expanded state. That is, even if the protrusion 541b is not guided by the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guide fastening portion 541e guides the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect member 540 are operated in association with each other.

  The fastening hole 541f is a through hole to which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

  The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a that is fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a rear surface restricting portion that extends upward from a position on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a that is one step higher on the rear surface side. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c protruding from the left and right sides of the rear surface restricting portion 542b to the rear surface in a wall shape, and a vertical projection penetrating the upper end portion of the rear surface restricting portion 542b to the rear surface. Mainly includes an insertion hole 542d and an auxiliary fastening portion 542e that extends from the back surface regulation portion 542b and is fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541e.

  The rear surface restricting portion 542b is a portion provided on the rear surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the rear surface and the protruding portion 541b from falling out from the arcuate hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the telescopic effect device 540 expands and contracts, and suppresses the deviation of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542.

  The insertion hole 542d is a hole into which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is slidably movable with respect to the first guide member 542.

  The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raised fastening portion 541d, and a rear surface restricting portion that extends upward from a position on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a that is one step higher on the rear surface side. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c protruding from the left and right sides of the rear surface restricting portion 543b to the rear surface in a wall shape, and an upper end portion of the rear surface restricting portion 543b which is formed so as to vertically penetrate therethrough. And an insertion hole 543d for insertion.

  The back surface restricting portion 543b is a portion provided on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and prevents the protruding portion 541b from coming off from the arcuate hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the telescopic effect device 540 expands and contracts, and suppresses the deviation of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543.

  The insertion hole 543d is a hole into which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable with respect to the first guide member 543.

  The slide plate 544 includes a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed portion 544b in which a wide recess extending vertically is formed on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and the recessed portion 544b. Both-end recessed portions 544c in which recesses extending in the up-and-down direction are formed on the front surfaces on the left and right sides, and a rail receiver protruding in a semicircular shape toward the front side at upper and lower end portions of the recessed portions 544c at both ends. A portion 544d, a cylindrical slide rod 544e extending vertically inwardly of the recessed portions 544c at both ends, and a production assistance wall 544f projecting toward the front in the substantially vertical center of the main body 544a, The upper and lower ends of the recessed portion 544b mainly include stopper portions 544g that are provided at both left and right ends so as to project toward the rear surface.

  The recessed portion 544b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520. Therefore, the width of the inner side surface of the recessed portion 544b is formed to be slightly larger than the width dimension of the expansion / contraction stopper 524.

  The both-end recessed portions 544c are portions for accommodating projections in which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. As a result, it is possible to guide the protrusions of the guide members 542 and 543, which are provided with the insertion holes 542d and 543d, from the outside.

  The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion housed in the guide rail portions 542c and 543c of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, wobbling of the guide members 542 and 543 with respect to the slide plate 544 can be suppressed.

  The slide rod 544e is a columnar rod that is inserted into the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 are formed so as to be slidable in the extending direction of the slide rod 544e (vertical direction in FIG. 26).

  The production assistance portion 544f is a portion that is brought into contact with the rear hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 and moves the decorative member 548 when the expansion / contraction producing device 540 is in the extended state. As a result, the appearance of the stretch effect producing device 540 can be changed.

  The stopper portion 544g is a portion that is in contact with the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 and defines the vertical movement end of the slide plate 544.

  The slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotary plate 520, and the other end opposite to the one end is fastened and fixed to the recessed portion 544b of the slide plate 544.

  The front plate member 546 is an effect part that can be visually recognized by the player, and is a plate-shaped main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 in a front view, and from the main body portion 546a toward the back side. It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b that is provided so as to project in accordance with the position where the fastening hole 541f is formed, and a pair of shaft support portions 546c that are provided so as to project from the upper end of the main body portion 546a toward the rear side.

  The fastening portion 546b is a portion that fixes the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and the fastening portion 546b is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

  The shaft supporting portion 546c is a portion that slidably supports the connecting sliding member 547. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support portion 546c is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b of the coupling sliding member 547.

  The connecting sliding member 547 is formed in a plate-like main body portion 547a, a pair of sliding elongated holes 547b formed in a vertically extending elongated hole and formed in the front-rear direction, and formed in the up-down direction. A pair of insertion holes 547c are mainly provided.

  The sliding long hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft supporting portion 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is formed to be slightly larger than that of the shaft supporting portion 546c. A collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is fastened and fixed to the tip end portion of the shaft supporting portion 546c, so that the connecting sliding member 547 is axially supported by the front plate member 546 without being pulled out. It The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

  The decoration member 548 includes a main body portion 548a formed in a plate shape and the connection sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front hanging portion 548b formed by hanging downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a. And a rear drooping portion 548c that is formed to hang downward on the rear side of the.

  When the connecting slide member 547 moves with respect to the front plate member 546, the front hanging portion 548b is covered with the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and is viewed separately from the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43). 37)) can be formed. As a result, the appearance of the stretch effect member 540 can be changed, and the effect effect can be improved.

  The rear drooping portion 548c is a portion that is brought into contact with the production auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 by the expansion / contraction operation of the telescopic production device 540. Are moved with respect to the front plate member 546.

  24 and 25, the description will be continued. The rotating arm member 550 has a body 551 formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 formed in one end of the body 551 in the front-rear direction, and a shaft support hole 552 close to the shaft support hole 552. And a deformed elongated hole 553 which is a specially shaped bottomed elongated hole formed on the back side of the main body 551 and a front side of the other end which is the opposite end of one end. The arcuate hole 554, which is an arcuate bottomed long hole, and the rear end side of the main body 551 protruding near the shaft support hole 552, the tip is bent like a hook, and the other arm of the torsion spring 517a is locked. And a locking portion 555 that is provided.

  The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole into which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517, so that the rotating arm member 550 is formed to be rotatable around the third shaft portion 517.

  The deformed elongated hole 553 is a portion into which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 will be described later.

  The arcuate hole 554 is a long hole into which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arcuate hole 554 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding portion 541b. Further, the arc formed by the arc-shaped hole 554 matches the arc formed by the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is swung about the first shaft portion 512 in the expanded state (FIGS. 37 to 39). Up to).

  Further, the arcuate hole 554 is provided with a tip portion 554a which is opened at the tip of the other end of the rotary arm member 550 and whose width widens at the tip.

  The second driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force that rotates the rotating crank member 570, and is inserted into the driving motor 561 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510. A drive gear 562 that is axially rotated by a drive motor 561 is mainly provided.

  The drive gear 562 is meshed with the transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotary crank member 570. As a result, when the drive gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

  The rotating crank member 570 is a member that transmits a driving force to the rotating arm member 550, and has a ring-shaped main body 571 pivotally supported by the second shaft 515 and an outer peripheral surface of the main body 571. The transmission gear teeth 572 to be provided, the restricting umbrella portion 573 formed so as to cover the transmission gear teeth 572 on the front side, and the center of the main body 571 are eccentric to each other and are slidably protruded to the front side. It mainly includes a protrusion 574 and a lid portion 575 formed with a diameter larger than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 and fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft portion 515.

  The transmission gear teeth 572 mesh with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 561 is transmitted to the rotary crank member 570.

  The restricting umbrella portion 573 prevents the drive gear 532 from being displaced from the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572. Thereby, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear teeth 572 can be optimized.

  The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion that is inserted into the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550. That is, whether the transmission of the driving force is formed or not is determined by the relationship between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550.

  The lid portion 575 is a portion for disposing the main body portion 571 in the base member 510 in a non-pullable manner.

  The relationship between the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. First, the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) and 29 (a).

  28A and 29A are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. Note that FIG. 28A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the extended position. 28 (a) and 29 (a), the deformed elongated hole 553 and the sliding protrusion 574 are shown by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 are shown by imaginary lines. To be done.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, when the rotating arm member 550 is in the retracted position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and the rotating crank member 570. A straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal to each other, and an upward orthogonal state is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, in a state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the projecting position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and the rotating crank member 570. It is possible to form a downward orthogonal state in which a straight line connecting the rotation axis of and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal to. Note that FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle from the downward orthogonal state described above.

  The deformed elongated hole 553 includes a transmission groove portion 553a through which the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 by the movement of the sliding protrusion portion 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c connected from the lower end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a, and a selection wall portion 553d mainly connecting the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Prepare

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the transmission groove portion 553a is a recessed groove that extends linearly to the left from the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove portion 553a is formed with a length that allows the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 to move from the upward orthogonal state to the downward orthogonal state, and the formation width of the inner peripheral surface thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. Largely formed. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted from the rotation crank member 570 to the rotation arm member 550 while the sliding protrusion 574 moves in the transmission groove 553a.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in the upward orthogonal state. The wall portion is formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574. That is, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the upward orthogonal state, the rotary crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotary arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotary crank member 570 is the rotary arm. Not transmitted to member 550.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed in the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b moves. The direction is oriented to the axis of rotation of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed so as to face the first non-transmission wall 553b, the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550 is the rotation of the rotating crank member 570. Oriented to the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall 553b, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is rotated by the rotation crank from the lower side wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged in the projecting position. It is a wall formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding protrusion 574 with the rotation axis of the member 570 as the center. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the downward orthogonal state (the state where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view in a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 29A), The rotating crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotating crank member 570 is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 29A, the moving direction of the second non-transmission wall portion 553b is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. Be done. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged so as to face the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 29B), the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550. Are directed to the axis of rotation of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed to face the second non-transmission wall 553c, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating.

  The selection wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed by a smooth curved surface connecting the right end portion of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b in front view and the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c in front view, and It is formed above the curve obtained by extending the transmission wall portion 553b.

  The selection wall portion 553d is arranged so as to face the right side portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed such that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c increases as it goes toward the left end portion of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), the sliding protrusion 574 crosses the first non-transmission wall 553b and the second non-transmission wall 553b. In the margin portion D (see FIG. 32B) before reaching the wall portion 553c, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation is not restricted. That is, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is not restricted by the sliding protrusion 574.

  The right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along an arc S1 centering on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is The second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed so as to intersect with the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the angle formed by the arc S1 and the right end portion.

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 that is necessary to accommodate the change amount changes. That is, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount while the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 is The sliding amount is smaller than the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c are in contact with each other by a predetermined amount. Therefore, depending on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall 553c or the selection wall 553d, the swing arm member 550 swings with respect to the speed of the rotary crank member 570. The speed can be changed.

  It returns to FIG. 28 to FIG. 31 and demonstrates. 28 to 31 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 showing the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in time series. Note that in FIG. 28A, the upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position), and in FIGS. 28 to 31, the rotating crank member 570 is counterclockwise in a front view. The rotated state is illustrated in order, the odd-shaped elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotary crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines. ..

  28 to 31, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 detects a posture in which it expands and contracts in the vertical direction by a position detection sensor (not shown), and the swing is stopped in that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, the swing of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is prevented by the resistance between the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25) and the drive gear 532.

  In the state of FIG. 28A, the rotary crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position vertically downward from the protrusion 541b by a distance h1. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state, the protruding portion 541b is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by the distance h1.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 28A (rotated counterclockwise by the angle T1 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A)), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by a distance h2 (h2 <h1) (see FIG. 28 (b). ) See) to reach. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and abut against each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), the angle T2 is counterclockwise (T2≈180 degrees> T1). ) Is rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553 (transmission region), enters the region facing the second non-transmission wall 553c, and the protrusion 541 becomes the reference. The state (see FIG. 29 (a)) is reached in a position spaced vertically above the horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3 <h2). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (c), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (rotated counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)) by an angle T3 (T3> T2). Then, the sliding protrusion 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 29B is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the sliding protrusion 574 moves toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 in the second direction. It is pushed by the non-transmission wall portion 553c. In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, so that the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in a front view from the states of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b).

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 29A, stopping the rotating crank member 570 can be considered. However, if the effect speed of the rotating arm member 550 is set to a high speed until just before reaching the extended position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second drive device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 decreases. If it is made gentle, the effect cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating crank member 570 is not stopped in the state of FIG. 29A but is rotated to the state of FIG. The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state of FIG. 29 (a) (the protrusion 541 can be stopped at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3). As a result, the speed of the rotary crank member 570 is maintained until the rotary arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotary crank member 570 is rotated from the state of FIG. 29 (a) to the state of FIG. 29 (b). The 570 can be slowed down. Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, it is possible to improve both the effect of the rotating arm member 550 and the durability of the second drive device 560.

  From the state of FIG. 29 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), the angle T4 is counterclockwise (T4≈270 degrees> T3). 30), the sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state of FIG. 30A is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  That is, while the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by a quarter turn from the state shown in FIG. 29A, the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture, and the protruding portion 541b is in the same position. Maintained. It should be noted that the length in which the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protruding portion 541b is maintained in the same position is the length during which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated ¼ round in the present embodiment. It need not be limited to that. The length by which the front plate member 546 is continuously arranged at the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than in the present embodiment, the length in which the front plate member 546 is continuously arranged at the lower position can be made longer than in the present embodiment.

  The rotation crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 30A (rotated counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A) by an angle T5 (T5> T4)). Then, the sliding protrusion 574 pushes up the selection wall portion 553d of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by a distance h2 (h2> h3). (See FIG. 30B). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and abut against each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). ).

  That is, when the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the selection wall portion 553d and the sliding protrusion 574 are brought into contact with each other, so that the rotating arm member is rotated. The driving force is transmitted to 550 (transmission area).

  From the state of FIG. 30 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (rotated counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)) by an angle T6 (T6> T5). Then, the sliding protrusion 574 enters the area of the odd-shaped elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, and the protrusion 541 extends vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h2). The state (see FIG. 31) of arranging at the separated positions is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and abut against each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). ).

  When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the front in the state of FIG. 31, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the region of the deformed elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall 553b, 28 (a) is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area).

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 31, the sliding protrusion 574 is pushed by the second non-transmission wall 553c toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. .. In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, so that the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG.

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 31, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotating arm member 550 is set to a high speed just before reaching the retracted position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second drive device 560, and the speed decrease of the rotating crank member 570 is moderated. When set to, it is not possible to improve the effect.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotation crank member 570 to the state of FIG. 28A without stopping in the state of FIG. You can As a result, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member 570 is decelerated from the state of FIG. 31 to the state of FIG. 28 (a). Can be made Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 that is interlocked with the rotating arm member 550 and the improvement of the durability of the second drive device 560.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotating crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotating arm member 550 can be reciprocally rocked between the retracted position and the extended position.

  From these things, when rotating the rotating crank member 570 at a constant speed in the counterclockwise direction as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b is moved to the reference horizontal line in a half period of the rotation cycle of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved down from a position vertically separated from O by a distance h1 to a position separated a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 during a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the protrusion 541b is maintained at a position of the reference horizontal line O during a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle. Is vertically moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  Here, in the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), and the rotating arm member 550 is extended. In the position, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal state (see FIG. 29A). It is possible to form the downward orthogonal state by rotating the rotary crank member 570 by a predetermined amount clockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 29 (a).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the extended position, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a half turn (180 degrees). Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotating arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the extended position (from FIG. 28A to FIG. 29A). (Refer to FIG. 28A through FIG. 29A) to FIG. 28A) can be made equivalent to the time required to swing from the extended position to the retracted position.

  The relationship between the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 showing the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in time series. 32 to 35, a state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view is illustrated, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotary crank member 570 are illustrated in hidden lines and expanded and contracted. The front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the rendering device 540 are illustrated in phantom lines.

  Note that in FIG. 32 (a), the upward orthogonal state described above is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position), and in FIGS. 32 (b) to 35, the rotating arm from FIG. 32 (a). A state in which the member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount is sequentially illustrated in chronological order.

  In the state of FIG. 32A, the rotary crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state. In this case, the protrusion 541b is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by a distance h1.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 32A (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32A)), sliding The protrusion 574 is moved in the region of the odd-shaped elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall 553b, and reaches the state of FIG. 32 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

  Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 32B, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, so that the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. It Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 32 (b).

  From the state of FIG. 32 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), and is rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12> T11). ), As shown in FIG. 33A, the sliding protrusion 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, in the margin portion D from the state of FIG. 32 (b) until the sliding protrusion 574 reaches the second non-transmission wall portion 553c beyond the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, the rotating arm member 550 is provided. Is not transmitted (non-transmission area), and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O and separated by a distance h4 (h4 <h1).

  From the state of FIG. 33A, the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32A)) is rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13> T12). ), And as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the sliding protrusion 574 abuts on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 which swings downward due to the action of gravity. It That is, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region) from the state of FIG. 33 (b) to the state of FIG. 34 (a). In the state shown in FIG. 33B, the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by a distance h5 (h5 <h4).

  From the state of FIG. 33 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), only the angle T14 (T14≈90 degrees> T13) in the clockwise direction. When it is rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O and separated by a distance h3. The state (see FIG. 34 (a)) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is brought into contact with the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

  Here, the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32B to 34A and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. Although the rotating direction of the moving crank member 570 is different, the rotating region (phase) of the rotating crank member 570 is the same.

  In this case, in the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32 (b) to 34 (a), the inner circumference of the deformed elongated hole 553 is moved in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570. While the surfaces are not in contact with each other, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotation arm member 550 (non-transmission area), while the rotation crank member 570 shown in FIGS. The driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

  Therefore, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed depending on the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570. Accordingly, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, two types of effect modes of the rotating arm member 550 can be formed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIG. 32 (a) and FIG. 34 (a), the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise in a front view. When rotated, the rotating arm member 550 is rocked by free fall depending on the gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 (non-transmission area). On the other hand, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the rotating arm member 550 is swung at a speed depending on the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570 (transmission area).

  Accordingly, even when the rotation speed of the rotation crank member 570 is constant, the rotation crank member 570 can be rotated in the same direction to rotate the rotation crank member 570 in the same phase. The variation of the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

  Further, since an increase in the variation of the swing speed of the rotating arm member 550 is achieved by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (formation of the margin portion D), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550. It is possible to eliminate the need for other members such as a changeover switch for changing, and it is possible to reduce the member cost.

  In this embodiment, the allowance portion D is formed on the pivotal support hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, as compared with the case where the allowance portion D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570, while the sliding protrusion 574 passes the allowance portion D for a predetermined distance. The distance that the protrusion 541b moves downward can be increased. Therefore, the change in the operation of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed can be made remarkable while suppressing the formation range of the margin portion D of the rotating crank member 570.

  From the state of FIG. 34 (a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15> T14). ), The sliding protrusion 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 34B is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the front in the state of FIG. 34B, the sliding protrusion 574 is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Pressed. In this case, since the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 34 (b).

  From the state of FIG. 34 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), only the angle T 16 (T 16 ≈180 degrees> T 15) in the clockwise direction. When it is rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state of FIG. 35 (a). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  From the state of FIG. 35 (a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), and is rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17> T16). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by a distance h2 (h2> h3) (FIG. 35). (See (b)). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  Here, when the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 and the swing of the rotary arm member 550 are always linked, it is difficult to shift the start timing of the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550. .. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 are started, it is necessary to generate a large amount of rigidity, which is a force that overcomes the inertia of each member. Therefore, a driving device having a large driving force is required, which may increase the size of the driving device.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the start timings of the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state of FIG. 34 (b) to the state of FIG. 35 (a), only the rotating crank member 570 is rotated until the state of FIG. 35 (a) reaches the state of FIG. 35 (b). The rotating arm member 550 can be started by interlocking with the rotating crank member 570.

  Thus, the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used to start the rotating arm member 550, and thus the driving force required for the second drive device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the second driving device 560 can be downsized.

  When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front in the state of FIG. 35B, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove portion 553a and reaches the state of FIG. 32A. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and abut against each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  From these facts, when rotating the rotating crank member 570 at a constant speed in the clockwise direction as shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the protrusion 541b is used as a reference in a period of 1/4 of the rotation cycle of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position vertically separated from the horizontal line O by a distance h1 to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically upwardly separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the protrusion 541b is vertically separated from the reference horizontal line O in a period of a half of the subsequent rotation cycle. The position is moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  In addition, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially accelerated by the gravitational acceleration when the moving arm descends, and on the other hand, when the moving arm moves upward, the moving speed is always equal to the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. To be done. Thereby, the mode of the speed change of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction effect device 540) can be changed according to the moving direction of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction effect device 540).

  With reference to FIG. 36, a change in the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction producing device 540) when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise will be described.

  FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A). In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the horizontal axis represents the swing angle in a manner in which the upper orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A) of the rotary crank member 570 is the left end, and the swing angle increases from there to the right, and the vertical axis represents In the figure, the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b is shown.

  In FIG. 36, the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise is shown by a curve CC1, and when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise. The distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b is shown by the curve CW1. The curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusions 541b shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, respectively. For comparison of the curves when the rotating crank members 570 are arranged in the same phase, A curve obtained by horizontally reversing the curve CC1 is shown by a phantom line as a curve CC2. As described above, by comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, by changing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, it is possible to change the ascending speed and the descending speed of the protrusion 541b that is vertically moved by the rotating arm member 550. You can

  As a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotary crank member 570 rotates clockwise, the rotary protrusion 574 rotates until it comes into contact with the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A). A case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) is arranged at the retracted position is shown by a broken line as a curve CW2. It should be noted that this corresponds to the case where the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) sets a large biasing force for swinging the rotating arm member 550 upward. In this case, the period in which the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position can be made longer.

  In the curves CC1 and CW1, in the angular range N1 in which the distance from the horizontal reference line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) is maintained unchanged, the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550 ( 28 (a)), a non-transmission region in which the driving force is not transmitted is formed. The width of the angular range N1 can be adjusted by the formation width of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A).

  Further, in the curve CW1, the angle until the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) comes into contact with the deformed elongated hole 553 (see FIG. 28A) of the rotating arm member 550. In the range N2, a non-transmission area in which the driving force is not transmitted is formed between the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550. The width of the angle range N2 can be adjusted by the formation width of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28A).

  As shown in FIG. 36, a curve is formed between the angle T11 and the angle T14 and the angle T4 and the angle T6 when the rotary crank members 570 (see FIG. 28A) are arranged in the same phase. The shapes of CW1 and curve CC1 are different (the curve CW1 and the curve CC2, which is the laterally inverted curve CC1, do not overlap).

  That is, when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) rotates in the manner of lifting the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) between the angle T4 and the angle T6, the angle is larger. The curve becomes a gentler curve as compared with the case where the rotating crank member 570 rotates in a manner of pushing down the rotating arm member 550 between 11 and the angle T14.

  This is because, in the curve CW1, the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28A) comes into contact with the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553 and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A). 28A is rotated, and in the curve CC1, the sliding protrusion 574 is brought into contact with the selection wall portion 553d of the deformed elongated hole 553 (see FIG. 28A) and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. It depends.

  Returning to FIG. 28A, description will be made. As described above, in the deformed elongated hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the forming angle with the arc S1 is small). The right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is formed in such a manner that the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c intersects with the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle of the arc S1. It

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 that is necessary to accommodate the change amount changes. That is, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount while the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 is The sliding amount is smaller than the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c are in contact with each other by a predetermined amount.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, when the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

  28 to 35, the case where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in one direction has been described, but the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 can be reversed halfway. As the timing for reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall 553b (for example, FIG. 28A, FIG. 31, FIG. 32A). 32 (b), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position), and the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall 553c (for example, FIG. 29 (a), 29 (b), 34 (b) and 35 (a), the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the projecting position).

  In this case, since the rotating arm member 550 does not come into contact with the rotating crank member 570 in the rotating direction, the resistance applied from the rotating arm member 550 to the rotating crank member 570 when the rotating crank member 570 is reversed in the rotating direction. Can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, since the position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position and the state in which it is arranged in the extended position is arranged, It is possible to facilitate the control of reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 in a state where the moving arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position or the extended position.

  By reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, it is possible to increase the variation of the reciprocating motion of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction.

  For example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by a half turn (see FIG. 29A), and then the rotation is performed. The case where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position by inverting the rotation direction of the dynamic crank member 570 and rotating it clockwise by a half turn is illustrated (see FIG. 28A). That is, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

  In this case, the projection portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570, and from the position h3 (h3 <h1). ) And move down to a position separated by. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 0 degree to 180 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b extends from a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 to a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) in a half period of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570. Move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

  Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and moved upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The same period can be used.

  Further, for example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 32 (a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise by a quarter turn (see FIG. 34 (a)). Next, the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570 is reversed, and the rotation arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position by rotating counterclockwise by a quarter turn (FIG. 32). (See (a)). That is, this is the case where the sliding protrusion 574 moves on the side closer to the shaft support hole 552.

  In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a period of ¼ of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570, and is spaced from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3 It descends to a position separated by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 0 degree to 90 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from a position vertically separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a period of ¼ of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570. Move up to the position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 270 degrees to 360 degrees.

  Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and raised by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The period of movement can be the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened as compared with the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

  When the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves downward, it can be partially freed (from the angle T11 to the angle T13), while the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves upward. In this case, the rotary crank member 570 is always moved at a speed corresponding to the rotation speed. Therefore, even when the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 when the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the moving direction of the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 ( The degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from the angle T11 to the angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

  Next, a difference in swing angle due to a difference in expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an expanded state will be described.

  37 to 39 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. 37 to 39, a case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an expanded state (a case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position) is illustrated. Further, FIG. 37 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 38, the protrusion 541 is in front of the state of FIG. 37. FIG. 39 shows the state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in the front view from the state in FIG. 37. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 29 (a). Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 upward.

  As shown in FIG. 37 to FIG. 39, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state is formed in an arc shape centered around the first shaft 512, and is rotated. It extends along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554 of the arm member 550. In other words, the arcuate hole 554 extends along the swing locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner side surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 is not arranged to face the swinging direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arc-shaped hole 554 does not act as a stopper that stops the swinging of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the swing of the rotary plate 520 is restricted. That is, the rotary plate 520 can be swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can be swung counterclockwise in the front view to the swing angle θ1, and the rotary plate 520 is moved to the second position. It can swing until it comes into contact with the stopper portion 518b, and the projection portion 541b can swing clockwise in a front view up to a swing angle θ2.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, when the protrusion 541b is swung to the left in the front view at the swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. In this case, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550, and the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554, which may cause a malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the protruding portion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 are not rotatable arm members. The protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned by being disposed so as to be engageable with the 550. That is, it is possible to prevent the stretching effect device 540 from being moved in the stretching direction independently of the rotating arm member 550.

  As a result, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the problem that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. As a result, the area in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged can be suppressed, and the area in which other movable members are arranged can be secured accordingly. Further, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

  Further, when the rotating arm member 550 swings in a state in which the protrusion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 shifts, and the protrusion 541b becomes circular. It becomes difficult to return to the arc-shaped hole 554, and there is a risk of malfunction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding protrusion 574 contacts the deformed elongated hole 553, so that the swinging arm member 550 is prevented from swinging (see FIG. 39).

  In addition, a movement locus of a point on the side farther from the rotation axis of the sliding protrusion 574 (a point farthest from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 which is in contact with the sliding protrusion 574. 39 (see FIG. 39), the rotating crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the posture of the rotating arm member 550.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. )), The protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554 by the time the rotary crank member 570 is placed in the state shown in FIG. think of. After the protrusion 541b is returned to the arcuate hole 554, the rotating crank member 570 is further rotated, and even if the rotating arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. There is no possibility that a malfunction will occur in which the arrow cannot return to the arcuate hole 554.

  In this case, when the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction producing device 540 are respectively swung, the rotating crank member 570 is stopped or started according to the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554. There is no need, and rotation of the rotating crank member 570 can be continued. In other words, it is only necessary to control the timing of swinging the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the rotating crank member 570 does not need to be controlled, and the rotation crank member 570 may be kept rotating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the control load of a complicated operation of swinging the expansion / contraction producing device 540 and the rotating arm member 550 at different timings.

  In the present embodiment, the tip portion 554a is formed so that the width of the arc-shaped hole 554 can be increased toward the opening end (the left end in FIG. 39) of the arc-shaped hole 554. As a result, it is possible to allow a large amount of positional deviation (positional deviation in the expansion / contraction direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554, and the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e. A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be secured.

  Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state that is a state between the extended state and the contracted state will be described. From the state where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the expanded state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b is moved corresponding to the arcuate hole 554 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise, and the expansion / contraction effect is generated. The device 540 forms the intermediate state.

  40 to 42 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. 40 to 42, a case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (a case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged between the extended position and the retracted position) is illustrated. In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than that when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  Further, FIG. 40 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 41, the protrusion 541 is in front of the state of FIG. 40. FIG. 42 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state in FIG. 40.

  The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 28B. Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 upward.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the arcuate hole 554 moving upward due to the swinging of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546 as described later. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state have a radius of curvature. Although the central axes of the two coincide with each other on the upper side, the radii of curvature and postures are different from each other. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the forming angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arc-shaped hole 554 functions as a stopper that stops the swing of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). ..

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the protrusion 541b is not in contact with the arcuate hole 554. That is, since the rotary plate 520 can be swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can be swung counterclockwise in the front view up to the swing angle θ3 (angle θ3 = Angle θ1).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554. In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the upper side surface of the rotating arm member 550 to prevent the expansion / contraction effect device 540 from changing in the expansion / contraction direction. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 42, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is shaken. Motion is stopped.

  That is, the rotary plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can swing clockwise in a front view up to a swing angle θ4 (angle θ4 <angle θ2). .. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. Accordingly, by varying the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, it is possible to increase the variation of the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. Note that, in the state of FIG. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e is in contact with the main body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550.

  Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state will be described. From the state in which the expansion / contraction production device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), by swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise, the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554, and the expansion / contraction production is performed. The device 540 creates a contracted state.

  43 to 45 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. 43 to 45, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position) is illustrated. In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  In addition, FIG. 43 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 44, the protrusion 541 is in front of the state of FIG. 43. FIG. 45 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state in FIG. 43. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. Therefore, in FIG. 43 to FIG. 45, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O upward by the distance h1.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the arcuate hole 554 moving upward due to the swinging of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both the function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and the function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state are different from each other, The central axis of the radius of curvature is reversed. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is below the protrusion 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arc-shaped hole 554 is disposed above the arc-shaped hole 554. In this case, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the forming angle α2 (angle α2> angle α1), and the arc-shaped hole 554 functions as a stopper that stops the swing of the protrusion 541b ( 44 and 45).

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541 b is brought into contact with the second stopper surface 554 c of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotary plate 520 is not rocked until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the protrusion 541b is rockable counterclockwise in front view up to the rocking angle θ5. (Angle θ5 <angle θ1 = angle θ3).

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the protrusion 541b abuts on the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotary plate 520 is not rocked until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can be rocked clockwise in a front view up to a rocking angle θ6 (angle θ6 <angle θ4. <Angle θ2). Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the swing width of the stretch effect producing device 540.

  Here, the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the formation angle α2 of the arcuate hole 554 in the contracted state are formed larger than the formation angle α1 of the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the intermediate state. It

  In the relationship between the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the protrusion 541b is swung in such a manner as to traverse the arcuate hole 554, and thus the protrusion 541b. The swing angle of is minimized. On the other hand, in the relationship between the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554, if the formation angle is 0 degrees (see FIGS. 37 to 39), the protrusion 541b extends along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554. As a result, the protrusion 541b has a maximum swing angle. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1 <formation angle α2. ).

  As described above, by changing the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction producing device 540, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is changed, and at that time, the inner peripheral surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 (the first stopper surface 554b, the second stopper surface 554b, The stopper surface 554c and the third stopper surface 554d) function as stoppers that regulate the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. Accordingly, the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554 can also be used as a portion that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 has different expansion / contraction states. Therefore, the space for disposing the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be suppressed.

  Further, the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by disposing the rotating arm member 550 at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where the fixed stopper is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the stopper remains on the front face of the third symbol display device 81 even when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position. Can be prevented. Accordingly, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, other members can be arranged on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81, and therefore other movable members (for example, the slide operation unit 700). It is possible to secure an overhanging space for the column member 720).

  Further, the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 functions as a stopper that restricts the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is driven by the second drive by swinging the rotating arm member 550. And a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion / contraction effect device 540 to perform an expansion / contraction operation. As a result, the functions can be integrated and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. The tilting operation unit 600 is a unit that swings (tilts) the effect member 620 (see FIG. 12), and the slide operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilting operation unit 600 in the left-right direction. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilt operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilt operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. Note that FIGS. 46 and 47 show a state in which the column members 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged at the retracted position.

  FIG. 48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. Note that in FIGS. 48 and 49, the tilting operation unit 600 is illustrated without being disassembled for easy understanding.

  The slide operation unit 700 is formed to be slidable in the left-right direction by fastening one end to a base member 710 formed in a plate shape elongated in the left-right direction and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710. A column member 720, and a slide rail 730 in which one end portion is fastened and fixed to the column member 720 and the other end portion to which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed is formed to be vertically expandable and contractible, A driving force is generated to move the connecting member 740, which is slidably formed on the rear rail portion 716 of the main body portion 710 and is pivotally supported by the pivot support projection 612 of the tilting operation unit 600, and the column member 720 in the left-right direction. The drive device 750 and a back cover member 760 formed on the back side of the drive device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710 are mainly provided.

  The base member 710 is a member that forms the skeleton of the slide operation unit 700, and is formed so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and the slide plate 711 to which the support member 720 is fastened and fixed from the rear side, and a rear view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 is provided in the lower left portion having a circular cross section and in which the fixed shaft portion 753a is supported, and a shaft support hole provided in the lower right portion of the base member 710 in a rear view in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the left-right direction. 712, and the slide shaft supporting hole 713 in which the moving shaft portion 754a is slidably supported, and the locking portion 725 of the strut member 720 which is vertically swingable by a solenoid. Of the lever member 714 that restricts the movement of the base member 710, and the upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740 that is provided in the upper end portion of the base member 710 so as to project toward the front side in a downward arc shape in section. The front rail portion 715 mainly comprises a rear rail portion 716 through plate portion 741b is inserted in the recessed by the coupling member 740 from the rear arc-shaped cross section in a front rail portion 715, a.

  Since the lever member 714 restricts the lateral slide movement of the column member 720 that is fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711, the driving force of the drive device 750 for maintaining the tilting operation unit 600 at the retracted position is unnecessary. You can

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting operation unit 600 is moved along the formation direction (arc trajectory) of the front rail portion 715 and the back rail portion 716, the right and left of the column member 720 connected to the tilting movement unit 600 is disposed. The sliding movement in the direction can occur due to the action of gravity applied to the tilting movement unit 600. For example, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting operation unit 600 is directed obliquely downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715. Therefore, even if the moving direction of the column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the left-right direction along the moving direction of the slide plate 711, the column member 720 may be moved by gravity. In this embodiment, when the lever member 714 is swung downward, the lever member 714 is engaged with the locking portion 725 of the column member 720, and the movement of the column member 720 in the left-right direction is restricted. Therefore, the driving force of the drive device 750 is reduced. Even if the above is unnecessary, the column member 720 can be maintained at the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the drive device 750 can be improved.

  The column member 720 has a main body 721 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a slide plate 711 of a base member 710 that is continuously provided in the lower end of the main body 721 in the left-right direction and is provided in the front-rear direction. A second fastening part 722 through which a screw to be fastened and fastened is inserted, and a second fastening part in which the slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the left end portion of the main body part 721 in a front view in a vertically continuous manner. The portion 723, a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723, and a slide hole 724 formed on the right side portion of the main body portion 721 when viewed from the front, and the right side of the main body portion 721. A lower lid part in which a belt 755 of the driving device 750 is sandwiched between a hook-shaped locking part 725 projecting upward from the lower end part and engaging with the lever member 714, and the main part 721, which is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main part 721. 726 and the main body 7 1. A rolling portion 727 projecting from the rear side of the lower end of the rear cover member 1 and capable of rolling on the inner peripheral surface of the slide recessed portion 764 of the rear cover member 760, and suspended from the upper end of the main body 721 to the lower front. And a coil spring 728 connected to the hook-shaped portion 617 of the base member 610 at its lower end.

  The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support member 720 in a posture capable of expanding and contracting in the direction in which the second fastening portions 723 are continuously provided.

  The slide hole 724 is a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the continuous direction of the second fastening portion 723, and is a long hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can suppress the lateral displacement of the vertically moving tilting operation unit 600 (relative rotation of the tilting operation unit 600 with respect to the column member 720).

  The lower lid portion 726 has a tooth shape extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile has a shape that meshes with the tooth profile formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 of the driving device 750. This can prevent the column member 720 from slipping on the belt 755 of the drive device 750.

  The rolling portion 727 is rotatably inserted into the slide recessed portion 764 of the back cover 760 to suppress the frictional resistance, and also suppresses the inclination in the front-rear direction about the lower end of the column member 720 as an axis. be able to.

  The coil spring 728 is an urging force that moves the tilting operation unit 600 upward. Since the tilting motion unit 600 is constantly loaded with the biasing force from the coil spring 728, the tilting motion unit 600 is prevented from falling downward due to gravity.

  The connecting member 740 is a base that is supported by a triangular plate-shaped main body member 741 that is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting protrusion 612 of the tilting movement unit 600, and a rolling shaft 741c that is provided so as to project from the main body member 741. A pair of cylindrical upper rolling members 742 that are rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. Of the front cover member 743 and the lower half of the front cover member 743, which is disposed on the lower portion of the front cover member 743 on the back side, is fitted and held by the front cover member 743 so that the upper half of the front cover member 743 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. And a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 that is moved.

  The main body member 741 is a member formed in a triangular plate shape, is a circular recess provided in the upper end portion from the rear surface, and is a shaft rotatably supported by the shaft support projection 612 of the tilting operation unit 600. A supporting portion 741a, an inserting plate portion 741b that is a plate-like member that is provided on the lower end portion so as to project toward the front side, and is slidably inserted into the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710, and the shaft supporting portion 741a to the inserting plate portion. It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c protruding in a column shape from the position axisymmetric with respect to a perpendicular drawn to 741b toward the front side and having an upper rolling member 742 rotatably supported.

  Since the insertion plate portion 741b is inserted into the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710, the connecting member 740 is formed to be movable along the rear rail portion 716. Therefore, the tilting operation unit 600 pivotally supported by the pivot support portion 741a is also formed so as to be movable along the back rail portion 716.

  The rolling shafts 741c are formed in pairs at positions that are line-symmetric with respect to the perpendicular line drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c abut on the front rail portion 715 formed in an arc shape via the upper rolling portion 742, the load applied from the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 to the connecting member 740 ( The force in the normal direction of the arc passes through the shaft supporting portion 741a. Therefore, the shaft supporting protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stably held by the connecting member 740.

  The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting portion 741 a and abuts on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the upper rolling portion 742 is rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, the frictional resistance generated when the connecting member 740 slides can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slide movement can be suppressed.

  The lower rolling member 744 has a lower half portion rotatably fitted around the lower portion of the front cover member 743 and an upper end portion abutting on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 slides along the front rail portion 715, the lower rolling portion 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 when the connecting member 740 slides, and to suppress the driving force required for the sliding movement.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 and the lower rolling member 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, it is possible to maintain the state in which the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched by the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744 of the connecting member 740 while suppressing frictional resistance.

  Here, since the center of gravity of the tilting operation unit 600 is formed upward as described later, there is a risk of tilting in the front-back direction. In this case, the connecting member 740 sandwiches the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 with the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744, so that the tilting motion unit 600 can be tilted in both the front and rear directions. , Can generate resistance. This makes it easier to maintain the posture of the tilting operation unit 600.

  The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740, and thereby pivotally supports the upper rolling member 742 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  The driving device 750 includes a driving motor 751 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and that generates a driving force that slides the support member 720, a driving gear 752 that is axially supported by the driving motor 751, and the driving gear 752. A shaft fixing gear 753 which is meshed with the belt 755 and a shaft moving gear 754 which is arranged apart from the shaft fixing gear 753 and around which the belt 755 is wound and a rotation shaft 754a is slidably movable. A belt 755 wound around the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 and moved by the rotation of the shaft fixing gear 753, and a coil for generating a biasing force for moving the shaft moving gear 754 in a direction away from the shaft fixing gear 753. A spring 756 is mainly provided.

  The shaft fixing gear 753 is a columnar member serving as a rotating shaft, and includes a fixed shaft portion 753a which is inserted into the shaft supporting hole 712 of the base member 710. Further, the shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754a which is a columnar member serving as a rotating shaft and is inserted into the slide shaft supporting hole 713 of the base member 710.

  The shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. A tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755. Accordingly, slippage between the belt 755 and the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the rotation amount of the shaft fixing gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755.

  One end of the coil spring 756 is fixed to a hook-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710 in rear view, and the other end is fixed to a case covering the shaft moving gear 754. .. As a result, an urging force that moves the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft supporting hole 712 can be generated, and appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755, so that the belt 755 can move the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear. It is possible to prevent the gear 754 from falling off.

  The back cover member 760 is a member that covers the drive device 750 on the back surface of the base member 710, and includes a main body portion 761 formed in a box shape with the front side open, and a fixed shaft portion 753a on the bottom surface of the main body portion 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a recess for receiving, a moving recessed portion 763 that is a recess that extends in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and that receives the moving shaft portion 754a, and a moving recessed portion 763 that extends in the left-right direction and receives the rolling portion 727. A slide recessed portion 764 that is a recess is mainly provided.

  The slide recessed portion 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 rolls on the upper and lower inner side surfaces thereof. The frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the column member 720 is suppressed, and the column member 720 is suppressed from tilting in the front-rear direction. That is, when the column member 720 tilts in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 abuts on either the upper inner surface or the lower inner surface of the slide recessed portion 764. Thereby, the tilt of the column member 720 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

  Next, the tilting operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600.

  The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-shaped base member 610 fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, and a box-shaped effect member 620 whose lower end is pivotally supported by the base member 610. A first driving device 630 that generates a swinging driving force of the effect member 620, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first driving device 630 to the effect member 620, and an abutting transmission of the transmission member 640. A torsion spring 650 that generates a biasing force that moves the member 640, and a second drive device 660 that mainly generates a driving force that opens and closes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the effect member 620 are mainly provided. ..

  The base member 610 includes a main body portion 611, which is formed into a vertically long plate shape, to which the slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed, and a cylindrical support portion of the connecting member 740, which is provided in a cylindrical shape from the front side of the main body portion 611. 741a is pivotally supported, and a pivot hole 626 of the effect member 620 is pivotally supported so that the pivot shaft 626 of the effect member 620 is a circular hole bored in the front-rear direction vertically above the pivot support protrusion 612. The first shaft support hole 613 and a circular hole formed in the front-rear direction vertically above the first shaft support hole 613, and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is pivotally supported in a swingable manner. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body portion 611 and inserted into a slide hole 724 of a column member 720 so as to be vertically slidable, and an insertion hole through which a drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted. 616 and from the lower end of the body 611 A hook-shaped hook portion 617 that extends toward the side, mainly comprising.

  The second shaft support hole 614 is provided with a lower receiving plate portion 614a protruding from its lower edge toward the front side in an arcuate cross section. The lower receiving plate portion 614a guides the rotation of the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed to have a left-right width that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the tubular portion 642 (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Since the auxiliary member 615 is inserted into the slide hole 724, the lateral inclination of the base member 610 can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid vertically.

  The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion to which one end of the coil spring 728 is hooked and a biasing force is applied.

  The effect member 620 and the second drive device 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a front exploded perspective view of effect member 620 and second drive device 660. The liquid crystal device disposed inside the effect member 620 is shown in phantom lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for describing the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660.

  The effect member 620 is a box-shaped member in which the liquid crystal device is disposed, and has a rectangular plate-shaped main body member 621 and a main body member 621 that extends from above and below the main body member 621 and covers the main body member 621. The upper and lower cover members 622 that can be bent, the left and right cover members 623 that are plate-shaped members that are attached from both side surfaces of the upper and lower cover members 622, and that form a rectangular box shape with the upper and lower cover members 622 open forward. A first curtain member 624 that is a member that opens and closes the opening and that is connected to the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660 and moves, and a member that opens and closes the front opening together with the first curtain member 624. A second curtain member 625 that is moved by being pulled by the curtain member 624; a columnar swing shaft portion 626 that is provided so as to project from the lower rear portion of the main body member 621; Mainly it includes center of gravity G (see FIG. 53) is formed above (higher position) than the pivot shaft portion 626. The center of gravity G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

  The main body member 621 includes a cylindrical sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that is provided above the swing shaft portion 626 so as to project to the back side in the vertical direction. The sliding shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

  The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that house the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the driving device 660. ..

  The left and right cover members 623 are provided with slide grooves 623a which are formed in a groove shape on the inner side surface and which allow the slide protrusions 625c of the second curtain members 625 to slide.

  The slide groove 623a is formed by connecting curved grooves formed in an arc shape to the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. As a result, the second curtain member 625 slides along the shape of the slide groove 623a in such a manner that linear movement and curved movement occur in sequence.

  The first curtain member 624 is a member that is vertically swung about an opening / closing shaft 664 of the second drive device 660, and has a body portion 624a formed by bending a plate material in a C-shaped cross section, and the body portion thereof. A fitting portion 624b that projects from the end portion of 624a in the left-right direction and is fitted into the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660 so that it cannot rotate relative to one another, and one end portion near the fitting portion 624b is the main body portion. A connecting member 624c is pivotally supported by the 624 and has the other end connected to the connecting protrusion 625b of the second curtain member 625.

  The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and is moved in the vertical direction. The main body portion 625a is formed in a plate shape having a C-shaped cross section, and the main body portion 624a has a C-shaped cross section. A connecting protrusion 625b protruding from the end in the left-right direction and connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left-right cover member 623 protruding in the left-right direction from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body 625a. 623a, and a slide protrusion 625c.

  The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 that is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the effect member 620, a drive gear 662 that is axially supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear of the drive gear 662 is meshed with each other. A pair of transmission gears 663 that are rotated in opposite directions, and an opening / closing shaft that is inserted into the transmission gears 663 so as to be relatively non-rotatable and rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by a shaft support mechanism (not shown). 664 and a transmission member 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of open / close shafts 664 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

  The transmission member 665 includes a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the first curtain member 624 is vertically swung about the opening / closing shaft 664.

  It returns to FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 and demonstrates. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 in which a drive shaft is inserted into an insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631. And a worm wheel 633 in the shape of a helical gear that meshes with the worm 632.

  The worm 632 is formed by a double thread. In the present embodiment, since the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, the worm wheel 633 makes one revolution while the worm 632 makes ten revolutions. Accordingly, the rotation angle of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution can be significantly reduced.

  The worm wheel 633 is provided with a locking projection 633 a that is projected from the center of the rotation shaft and is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610 and that is locked to the tubular portion 643 of the transmission member 640 so as not to rotate relative to it. Prepare It should be noted that the transmission of the driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is structurally limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 actively rotates, the force is reduced to the worm wheel 633). 632 in the axial direction). As a result, the load that the drive motor 631 receives when stopping the worm wheel 633 can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped in a state where the power of the drive motor 631 is cut off, and the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

  The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53A and 53B are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. Note that, in FIGS. 53A and 53B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the description of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. To do. Further, FIG. 53A shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642. In this state, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 causes the transmission member 640 to move. Balanced in the rocking direction. In FIG. 53B, the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined amount and the effect member 620 is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state of FIG. 53A.

  The transmission member 640 is a member that is oscillated by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50), and includes a main body portion 641 formed in the shape of a long rectangular rod, and one end portion of the main body portion 641. In the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 642, which extends in the axial direction and in which the locking protrusion 633a of the first drive device 630 is locked, and the other end of the main body 641 that extends in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 642. A sliding hole 643 formed as a hole, an abutting portion 644 arranged on both sides of the main body 641 in the swinging direction, and the abutting portion 644 and the front side surface of the main body 641 are connected to each other. A front arc plate 645 having a wide arc shape and a back arc plate 646 having a wide arc shape that connects the contact portion 644 and the rear side surface of the main body 641 are mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate 645, and the back arc plate 646 are arranged so as to surround the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650. This can prevent the torsion spring 650 from falling off (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

  The tubular portion 642 is axially supported by the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked by the locking projection 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first drive device 630 so as not to rotate relative to it. It

  The sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the sliding hole 643. Accordingly, when the transmission member 640 is swung about the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is rotated. While being slid in the sliding hole 643 (sliding in the axial direction), the effect member 620 is swung about the first shaft support hole 613.

  By swinging the effect member 620 in this manner, it is possible to suppress the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the drive motor 631 is rotated by the minimum unit of resolution of control of the drive device. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method in which a gear is directly connected to the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the driving force of the drive motor is transmitted to the gear can be considered. However, in this case, the angle P0 of the minimum unit of control resolution of the drive motor (see FIG. 53 (a), the angle is shown several times larger than the actual angle P0 for easy understanding. The amount of movement X1 by which the center of gravity of the effect member 620 deviates in the left-right direction from the inverted state when the effect member 620 is rotated becomes larger as the center of gravity of the effect member 620 moves away from the swing shaft portion 626. Therefore, as the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is separated from the swing shaft portion 626, it becomes more difficult to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the effect member 620, and the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is placed right above the swing shaft portion 626. It becomes difficult to make the effect member 620 stand still in the state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the rendering member 620 is connected to the sliding shaft portion 621a of the rendering member 620. The length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the tubular portion 642 which is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640 is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626 which is the swing shaft of the effect member 620. It is formed shorter than.

  Therefore, even when the effect member 620 is long in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the angle P0 (see FIG. 53 (a)), which is the minimum unit of resolution of control of the drive device, can be easily understood. Therefore, the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity of the effect member 620 when the drive device is operated at an angle several times larger than the actual angle P0) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the movable member stand still in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged right above the first axis.

  As a method of swinging the effect member 620, gear teeth are formed on the effect member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear that meshes with the gear teeth is rotated by a drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 can be considered. However, in this case, the larger the swing range of the effect member 620, the larger the range in which the gear teeth on the arc are formed in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the effect member 620 is formed in a thin shape in the swinging direction, the gear teeth on the arc protrude from the effect member 620, which hinders the effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 becomes low.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the performance member 620, the tubular portion 642 that is the swing shaft is the swing shaft portion 626 that is the swing shaft of the performance member 620. Is arranged vertically above and is connected to the swing shaft portion 621a at the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Since the effect member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 with respect to the swing range of the effect member 620 can be suppressed near the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Accordingly, even if the effect member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, the transmission member 640 can be prevented from protruding from the effect member 620, and the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 can be improved.

  The lower surface of the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640. As a result, the weight of the effect member 620 is applied not only to the swing shaft portion 626 but also to the transmission member 640. That is, a force that opposes the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the swing shaft portion 626 but also from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported by the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 at two points, and the radial force applied to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be suppressed. ..

  Here, since the effect member 620 is in the normal state in the inverted state shown in FIG. 53A, it is possible to quickly return to the inverted state after the transmission member 640 is swung and swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state. Is desirable.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view at the swing angle φ1 from the state shown in FIG. 53 (a), the effect member 620. Is swung at a swing angle φ2 (φ2 <φ1).

  That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 swung by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53A).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a long hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed in the axial direction of the transmission member 640, and the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the sliding hole 643. Then, since the swing axes of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are different, and the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, the transmission member 640. The more the oscillates, the more the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the oscillating shaft of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53A) is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state ( The arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in FIG. 54B) is made shorter than the arm length R2.

  That is, the arm length of the transmission member 640 is shortened as it approaches the inverted state, and the swing length of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined angle is constant. Compared with the case of, the size can be made smaller as it approaches the inverted state. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the drive motor 631 is not changed, the operation speed of the effect member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position, while the operation speed of the effect member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the effect member 620 is inverted. It is possible to make it easier to stand still in the state (the production member 620 can be easily stopped and controlled in a state where the center of gravity of the production member 620 is arranged vertically above the first shaft support hole 613).

  With reference to FIG. 55, the swing of the rendering member 620 with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the rendering member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The change in angle will be described.

  FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53 (a)) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53 (a)). In FIG. 55, the rotating shaft M1 corresponds to the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53A) that is the rotating shaft of the effect member 620, and the rotating shaft M2 is the tubular portion 642 that is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53A). The straight lines a1 to a4 are schematic representations of the arrangement of the transmission member 640, and are straight lines drawn radially from the rotation axis M2. The straight line a1 passes through the rotation axis M1 and the straight lines a2 to a4 are the straight line a1. Are formed in such a manner that the formation angles of are sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angles formed by adjacent straight lines of the straight lines a1 to a4 are set to 15 degrees.

  An arc drawn with the radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53 (a)) about the rotation axis M2 is shown by the arc SR1, and the arm length R2 about the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54 (b)). An arc drawn with a radius equal to is shown by arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn around the rotation axis M1 and has a radius of a length obtained by adding the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2 to the arm length R1.

  These arcs assume the locus of the connecting position of the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53A). In the present embodiment, the sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53 (a)) as the connecting position is provided so as to project from the effect member 620, and the connecting position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. .. In addition, when the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, the effect member 620 is formed with a long hole in the axial direction, and the transmission member 640 changes its position. It is assumed that the shaft inserted into the long hole is provided in a protruding manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is shown as an intersection P10, the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is shown as an intersection P11, and the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is shown as an intersection P12. It is illustrated by.

  Similarly, the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is shown as an intersection P20, the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is shown as an intersection P21, and the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is shown as an intersection P22. An intersection point of the straight line a3 and the circular arc SR0 is shown as an intersection point P30, an intersection point of the straight line a3 and the circular arc SR1 is shown as an intersection point P31, and an intersection point of the straight line a3 and the circular arc SR2 is shown as an intersection point P32. An intersection point of the straight line a4 and the circular arc SR0 is shown by an intersection point P40, an intersection point of the straight line a4 and the circular arc SR1 is shown by an intersection point P41, and an intersection point of the straight line a4 and the circular arc SR2 is shown by an intersection point P42. The intersection P10 and the intersection P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection P40 and the intersection P42 are arranged at the same position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P10 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 is shown as an angle A10, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P11. The angle formed by the rotation axis M1 and the straight line passing through the intersection point P21 is illustrated as an angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P12 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 is illustrated as the angle A12. To be done.

  Similarly, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 is illustrated as an angle A20, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21 and the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31. An angle formed by a straight line passing through is shown by an angle A21, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 is shown as an angle A22. An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P40 is illustrated by an angle A30, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P41. The angle formed by and is indicated by an angle A31, and the angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P42 is indicated by an angle A32. It should be noted that these angles correspond to the swing angle of the effect member 620.

  Here, the ratio of (distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is (1: 2.32: 2.54) in the present embodiment. When the angle is actually measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when swinging the transmission member 640 between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the rendering member 640 is the largest when the transmission member 640 and the rendering member 620 are connected along the arc SR0. The case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR2 is formed as described above (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

  The angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, the angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and the angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR2. This is lower than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A22 and the angle A20 is smaller than the difference between the angle A20 and the angle A21 (the angle A20 is closer to the angle A22 than the angle A21).

  The angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, the angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and the angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a2 and the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR1. This exceeds the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A12 and the angle A10 is larger than the difference between the angle A10 and the angle A11 (the angle A10 is closer to the angle A11 than the angle A12).

  From these, by setting the locus of the connecting position of the transmission member 640 and the rendering member 620 (see FIG. 53A) to the arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 swings at a constant speed, the rendering member It is understood that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. That is, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 is brought close to the angular velocity (high speed side) when the locus of the connecting position of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a1. The angular velocity when arranged can be brought close to the angular velocity (low speed side) when the locus of the connecting position of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR1.

  Further, when the ratio of each angle is calculated, the angle A22 / angle A32 is 0.98, and the angle A12 / angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21 / angle A31 is 0.98, and the angle A11 / angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the locus of the connecting position of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at a constant speed. In this case, the deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

  On the other hand, the angle A20 / angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10 / angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the locus of the connecting position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is the arc SR0 (arc about the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant speed. The deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when it is swung toward the state can be 3 to 5%. That is, the deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased as compared with the case where the loci of the connecting positions are the arcs SR1 and SR2 (the arcs centering on the rotation axis M2).

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is brought into contact with the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so that the force of the gravity G of the effect member 620 causes the swing axis. The part 626 and the tubular part 642 are hung vertically downward. Therefore, the force of the component in the direction in which the effect member 620 is swung is not generated due to the gravity of the effect member 620. Therefore, even if the power of the first drive device 630 is shut off, the attitude of the effect member 620 is maintained in the inverted state. You can Thereby, the durability of the first drive device 630 can be improved.

  Further, since the force of the gravity G of the effect member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, the rotation resistance of the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be increased. It is possible to easily maintain the posture of the effect member 620 in the inverted state.

  The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring that generates an urging force in the direction in which the coil portion 651 is rewound (the direction in which the transmission member 640 is pushed back) along with the swing of the transmission member 640, and the twist shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. A coil portion 651 wound around, a biasing arm portion 652 extending along both side surfaces of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 in the swinging direction, an end portion of the coil portion 651 and an end portion of the biasing arm portion 652. A connecting arm portion 653 that connects the portion through the space between the tubular portion 642 and the swing shaft portion 626 is mainly provided.

  The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter that is about three times the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the urging arm 652 is swung and a load that causes the coil 651 to contract and deform is generated, the amount of deformation of the coil 651 can be secured, and the urging arm 652 and the connecting arm 653 are deformed. Can be suppressed.

  The biasing arm portion 652 is surrounded by the main body portion 641, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the urging arm portion 652 from falling off (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

  Further, the biasing arm portion 652 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the plane on which the transmission member 640 swings. Therefore, a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated from the biasing arm portion 652 arranged in the swinging direction of the transmission member 640, and the biasing arm portion arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 640 in the swinging direction. 652 is prevented from moving by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. As a result, the torsion spring 650 is formed so as to be able to generate a biasing force in the direction in which the transmission member 640 is pushed back regardless of the swing direction of the transmission member 640.

  A bent portion 653a that is bent on the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed at the connecting portion of the biasing arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653. In this case, the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650, as described later, so that the bent portion 653a is extended (see FIG. 54 (b)). As a result, the contact position between the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes far from the tubular portion 642, and the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 is increased. You can

  With reference to FIG. 54, a change in the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 and pushing back the transmission member 640 will be described. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 53 is appropriately used to explain the change in the biasing force generated from the torsion spring 650. refer.

  Further, in FIG. 54A, from the state of FIG. 53B, the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in front view, and the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side in front view of the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. A state in which the pressure member starts to be pressed against the inner side surface is illustrated. In FIG. 54 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 54 (a), and the bending portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled. The extended state is shown.

  In the state of FIG. 54A, a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated in the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side in the front view of the torsion spring 650. This urging force is the sum of the urging force generated from the coil portion 651 and the bending portion 653a.

  That is, in the state of FIG. 53 (b), the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the bending portion 653a arranged on the left side in the front view of the pair of bending portions 653a, so the biasing arm of the torsion spring 650 on the left side in the front view. As the biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640, only the biasing force from the coil portion 651 is generated in the portion 652.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54A, in addition to the urging force having the coil portion 651 as the starting point, the urging force is generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 having the bending portion 653a as the starting point. Therefore, the spring constant of the biasing arm portion 652 can be increased. It should be noted that the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a causes the length of the portion to be deformed to be shorter than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so the unit deformation amount of the transmission member 640. The biasing force generated by the hit can be increased.

  In the state of FIG. 54B, the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pushed by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640, so that the angle formed by the biasing arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 is widened. As a result, the contact position length L1 which is the distance between the contact position of the main body 641 of the transmission member 640 and the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the tubular portion 642 in the state of FIG. 54B, the similar contact position length L2 in the state of FIG. 54B is separated from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. That is, the contact position length is extended. As a result, the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is lengthened, so that the moment applied from the torsion spring 650 to the transmission member 640 can be increased.

  Therefore, for example, when the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially equal in the state of FIG. 54 (a) and the state of FIG. 54 (b), the load on the transmission member 640 is further increased in FIG. 54 (b). The generated moment can be increased. Therefore, the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 can be pushed back more easily.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is small when the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (effect member 620) from the retracted position is small, and the swing angle is large. It is increased elastically, and is increased more than the elastic increase with the state of FIG. 54 (a) as a boundary. Therefore, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 required when the effect member 620 is set to the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54B) is determined, the torsion spring only elastically increases. Compared with, the biasing force when the swing angle is small can be set smaller (a soft spring can be used).

  As a result, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the operation speed at the time of starting the swing of the effect member 620 is reduced by the biasing force of the torsion spring 650, and it is possible to increase the operation speed at the time of starting the operation of the effect member 620. ..

  Further, since the urging force is increased by an elastic amount or more after the state of FIG. 54 (a), the swing angle of the effect member 620 is set to the state of FIG. 54 (a) or more, The deceleration acceleration of the effect member 620 can be increased. Thereby, the timing of starting deceleration of the effect member 620 can be delayed between the swinging motions of the effect member 620. Therefore, the swing angle at which the effect member 620 can be swung at a high speed can be increased, and the effect of the tilting operation unit 600 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the sliding operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 56 is a front view of the tilt motion unit 600 and the slide motion unit 700. In FIG. 56, a state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position is illustrated by an imaginary line, and a state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is slid from the retracted position by a predetermined amount is illustrated by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, a connecting member 740 that connects the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700, which are formed to be slidable in the vertical direction, is formed to be movable in the extending direction of the front rail portion 715. .. Here, since the weight of the tilting motion unit 600 is loaded on the connecting member 740, when the tilting motion unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the tilting motion unit 600 is gravitationally moved to the left along the front rail portion 715 when viewed from the front. Will be urged towards you. Therefore, in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 at the retracted position, it is conceivable to fix the driving device 750.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be vertically swingable, and when the lever member 714 is swung downward, the lever member 714 is engaged with the locking portion 725 of the column member 720, and the left and right columns of the column member 720 are engaged. The sliding movement in the direction is restricted.

  This makes it possible to mechanically maintain the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position, so that when the tilting unit 600 is placed in the retracted position, the tilting unit 600 is stopped with the drive device 750 stopped. Can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

  It should be noted that from the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is located at the retracted position, the lever member 714 is swung upward and the driving device 750 is operated, whereby the support member 720 can be moved, and the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in the left-right direction. You can slide it to.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position in the inverted state, the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600.

  Here, since the tilt movement unit 600 slides along the front rail portion 715, the tilt movement unit 600 moves while being slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position (see the imaginary line in FIG. 56) in FIG. Always has a vertical component.

  Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600 and the pivotal support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 are displaced in the vertical direction, a load may be applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting operation unit 600. This is the same when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid in the opposite direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shaft supporting portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied from the connecting member 740 to the tilting operation unit 600 and the center of gravity G are. It is formed on the same line. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting operation unit 600, and to stabilize the attitude of the tilting operation unit 600.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (pivoting motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 on the sliding motion of the sliding motion unit 700 will be described. FIG. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. Note that FIG. 57 illustrates a state where the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is swung to the state of FIG. 54 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 57, when the effect member 620 is swung counterclockwise in the front view, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged on the left side in the front view with respect to the connecting member 740. Therefore, the acceleration to the left in the front view, which is applied to the connecting member 740, is increased.

  In this case, the driving force required to slide the tilting operation unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, so that the driving motor 751 of the driving device 750 can be downsized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, a tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface has been described, but the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 2640. 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641a that abuts on the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  58 (a), 58 (b) and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. 58 (a), 58 (b) and 59, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown by imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 58A shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 58B shows the inverted state of FIG. 58A. From the front, the transmission member 2640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and a state in which the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is brought into contact with the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is shown in FIG. 59. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 58B is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58A), the main body portion 2641 is pressed against the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 2641 is moved. The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that swings in a direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 is swung and the biasing arm portion 652 is deformed, the coil portion 651 is contracted and deformed by the connecting arm portion 653 connected to the deformed biasing arm portion 652. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the urging force for swinging the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, due to the difference in swing angle between the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 2640, the contact position between the main body portion 2641 of the transmission member 2640 and the biasing arm portion 652 ( The tip position of the biasing arm portion 652 is changed by the swing of the transmission member 2640. That is, as the transmission member 2640 swings, the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 is moved to the tip end side of the main body portion 2641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise in a front view in a state where the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the distal end portion of the biasing arm portion 642. The biasing arm portion 642 is restricted by the abutting portion 2641a from moving toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung while the transfer arm portion 642 is restricted in movement by the contact portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, the movement of the biasing arm portion 642 to the tip end side of the main body portion 2641 is restricted, so that the base side (bending portion 653a side) of the biasing arm portion 642 is moved downward. As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction in which the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced (the direction in which the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 increases).

  That is, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state of FIG. 59 can be increased as compared with the case without the abutting portion 2641a. Thereby, the degree of change in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (the increasing rate of the biasing force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) is increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 compared to the state shown in FIG. You can Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased, while when the swing angle is large (see FIG. 59), It is possible to increase the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 in a non-linear manner (more than elastic change) and obtain a sufficient biasing force to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width has been described, but the tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 3640. 3641 is provided with an inclined side surface 3641a that is inclined in such a manner that the side surface of the torsion spring 650 that abuts against the tip end portion of the torsion spring 650 becomes wider toward the tip end side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 60A and FIG. 60B are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. Note that, in FIGS. 60A and 60B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 60A shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, and FIG. 60B shows the inverted state of FIG. 60A. The transmission member 3640 is shown in a state of being swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A), the main body portion 3641 is pressed against the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is moved. The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that swings in a direction of returning to the inverted state.

  When the transmission member 3640 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 60A to the state shown in FIG. 60B, the swing angle between the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 3640 changes. The contact position between the body portion 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the biasing arm portion 652 (the tip position of the biasing arm portion 652) is changed by the swing of the transmission member 3640. That is, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A) becomes larger, the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 is closer to the tip end side of the main body portion 3641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643). ) Is moved to.

  Therefore, the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641a of the main body portion 3641. That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 is deformed by the swinging angle of the transmission member 3640 and also by the width of the transmission member 3640 being enlarged by the inclined side surface 3641 a. .. In this case, the width of the transmission member 3640 becomes wider toward the tip of the transmission member 3640. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A) becomes larger, the inclined side surface 3641a becomes larger. As a result, the deformation of the torsion spring 650 due to the increased width of the transmission member 3640 is increased. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 increases, the increasing rate of the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (change in biasing force of the torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 3640) can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, a tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described. However, in the tilting operation unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment, the transmission member 4640 adds the contact portion 644 to the contact portion 644 thereof. A moving contact member 4647 having a width smaller than that of the portion 644 is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  61A is a rear perspective view of the transmission member 4640 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61B is a rear perspective view of the moving contact member 4647. It should be noted that the illustration of the moving contact member 4647 is omitted in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the front arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645 a that are symmetrically arranged at intervals shorter than the arrangement interval of the contact portions 644 and are bored in the front-rear direction. Prepare The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of rear projections 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the moving contact member 4647 includes a main body portion 4647a formed in an elongated plate shape, and a pair of rear surface protrusions protruding from both end portions of the main body portion 4647a to the rear surface side. It mainly includes a portion 4647b and a front projection portion 4647c that is provided in a semi-spherical tip on the front side from substantially the center of the main body portion 4647.

  Note that one end of a coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front protrusion 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (Fig. 62 (c) and See FIG. 62 (d). Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring 4648 is not shown in FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), 62 (a) and 62 (b).

  The back protrusion 4647b is a portion that is inserted from the front side into the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640, and has a sufficient length from the front arc plate portion 4645 (abutment with the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650) at the time of insertion. It is formed in such a way that the (possible length) is projected. The back projection 4647b is formed so as to be inclined at an angle at which the bias arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 comes into contact with the surface (line) (see FIG. 64 (b)). As a result, the load applied to the biasing arm portion 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) as compared with the case where the biasing arm portion 652 and the back projection 4647b are in point contact, and the biasing arm portion 652 is provided. The durability of can be improved.

  The front projection portion 4647c is a portion that abuts on the main body member 4621 (see FIG. 63) of the effect member 4620, and the moving abutting member 4647 is provided in relation to the escape opening portion 4621a formed on the main body member 4621. It may be separated from the front arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62 (c)), or the moving contact member 4647 may be brought close to the front arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62 (d)). Since the tip of the front protrusion 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, the front protrusion 4647c can be easily mounted on the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

  62 (a) and 62 (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62 (c) and 62 (d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. 62 (a) and 62 (c), the state in which the moving contact member 4647 is separated from the front arc plate portion 4645 is different from that in FIG. 62 (b) and FIG. 62 (d). The state in which the 4647 is brought close to the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is shown respectively.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic front view schematically showing main body member 4621 of effect member 4620. It should be noted that the transmission member 4640 forming an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is the central state 4640C, the state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise as viewed from the front is the counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and the transmission member 4640 is the The state of being swung clockwise in the front view is shown as a clockwise swing state 4640R by imaginary lines. Further, in the center state 4640C, the counterclockwise swinging state 4640L, and the clockwise swinging state 4640R, illustration of the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 4645, and the back arc plate portion 646 is omitted for easy understanding. ..

  The main body member 4621 includes an escape opening 4621a formed in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the escape opening 4621a has a region (center state 4640C and counterclockwise oscillation) in which the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is pivoted counterclockwise as viewed from the front. (Moving state 4640L).

  When the front protrusion 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps with the escape opening 4621a when viewed from the front, the front protrusion 4647c is inserted into the escape opening 4621a and the moving contact member 4647 is transmitted by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648. Is separated from the main body 641 (see FIG. 62C). On the other hand, when the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap with the escape opening 4621a (overlaps with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c is brought into contact with the side surface of the effect member 4620 on the back side of the main body member 4621 and the moving contact member. 4647 is brought close to the main body 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62D).

  That is, the rear projection 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 is extended to a position where it can contact the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the inverted state when viewed from the front. Be done. Therefore, the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the inverted state when viewed from the front, compared to when it is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The increasing rate of the biasing force (the degree of increase of the biasing force with respect to the swing angle) can be increased.

  64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. 64A and 64B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are shown by imaginary lines, and the main body portion 4647a of the moving contact member 4647a is illustrated for easy understanding. Illustration is omitted. Further, FIG. 64 (a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 64 (b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 64 (a). The transmission member 4640 is oscillated by a predetermined amount clockwise in the front view, and the biasing arm 652 on the left side in the front view is brought into contact with the rear projection 4647b.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), while the swing angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, it is possible to contact the biasing arm portion 652 from the opposite side (contact portion 644 side) of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640. By doing so, the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in the front view can be increased.

  Thus, the urging force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise in the front view is improved while the starting speed when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view is increased. You can Therefore, it is possible to suppress the effect member 4620 from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210.

  That is, when the tilting operation unit 4600 is placed in the retracted position and the effect member 4620 is in the inverted state, the inner surface of the rear case 210 comes close to the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, when the effect member 4620 is swung vigorously toward the inverted state from the state where the effect member 4620 is swung counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 57), the effect member 4620 cannot be decelerated completely and the rear case 210. The effect member 4620 may collide with the inner surface of the.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear projection 4647b is projected at the timing when the effect member 4620 is swung clockwise from the inverted state (see FIG. 62D), and the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is applied. Can be increased. Accordingly, when the effect member 4620 is tilted clockwise from the inverted state in the front view while maintaining a high operation speed when the effect member 4620 is tilted counterclockwise from the inverted state in the front view, the effect member 4620 is sufficient. Can be slowed down.

  In addition, a direction in which the rear projection 4647b is pushed back at the contact point between the rear projection 4647b and the biasing arm 652 arranged on the side opposite to the swinging direction of the transmission member 4640 (FIG. 64 (b), front view counterclockwise). ) Will generate an urging force. As a result, as compared with the case where the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 (the right side in FIG. 64 (b)), the transmission member 4640 is pushed with a larger biasing force. Can be pushed back. On the other hand, the biasing force generated by the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 can be improved.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the contact portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side opposite to the side close to the transmission member 4640 come into contact with each other to the lower receiving plate portion 614a. The distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is shorter than that of the above. In this case, it is easy to move the bent portion 653a by the force from the contact portion 644 with the lower receiving plate portion 614 as the fulcrum, but the opposite is difficult (the distance from the fulcrum to the action point is different. Because).

  Therefore, the urging force generated by the deformation of the urging arm 652 on the left side in front view caused by the contact between the contact portion 644 and the urging arm 652 is generated by the deformation of the entire torsion spring 650. That is, the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side in front view and the rear projection 4647b are brought into contact with each other, and the bent portion 653a on the left side in front view is leftward in front view (inner diameter of the coil portion 651) with the lower receiving plate 641a as a fulcrum. Is deformed in the direction of narrowing (i.e., in the direction of narrowing) the deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the biasing arm portion 652 on the right side in front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 is deformed by reducing the inner diameter, a biasing force is generated in the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 toward the side that increases the inner diameter of the coil portion 651, and the right side in the front view (transmission member). The urging force of the urging arm portion 652 (on the side of the rocking direction of 4640) that pushes back the transmission member 640 can be improved.

  Next, the combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68.

  In the first embodiment, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the projecting position, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. However, the rotating arm member 5550 according to the fifth embodiment includes the recessed portion 5556 in which the non-transmission wall portion 5553c is recessed in the direction away from the rotating crank member 570. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  65 to 68 are front views of the combined operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 65, the state in which the rotating arm member 5550 is arranged at the extended position and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged near the left end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is shown in FIG. Then, from the state of FIG. 65, the state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. However, in FIG. 67, the state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 66 to the position where the sliding protrusion 574 is disengaged from the recessed portion 5556 is shown in FIG. From the state, the state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the two-sided recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is illustrated respectively. It

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c of the combined operation unit 5550 includes a recessed portion 5556 recessed in a direction away from the rotary crank member 570.

  The recessed portion 5556 has a first wall portion 5556a having an arc shape (about 1/4 of a circular shape) formed on the left side in front view, and an arc shape (about 1/4 of a circular shape) formed on the right side in front view. The second wall portion 5556b and the second wall portion 5556b are mainly provided and are configured to allow the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 to slide. That is, the depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is equal to or less than the radius of the sliding protrusion 574, and the connection portion of the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is smooth. It is formed from a curved surface.

  When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 65, a gap is generated between the sliding protrusion 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, The rotating arm member 5550 is rocked by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a until it abuts on the sliding protrusion 574. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c rotates while sliding on the sliding protrusion portion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517 a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are rotated. The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding protrusion 574 causes the first recess from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c. It is pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the installation portion 5556, and the rotating arm member 5550 is again swung (pushed down) to the extended position. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, since the second wall portion 5556b is pushed and moved by the sliding protrusion portion 574, the rotating arm member 5550 swings, The driving force of the second drive device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570.

  Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are rotated. The crank member 570 forms a transmission state.

  When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, a gap is generated between the sliding protrusion 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, The rotating arm member 5550 is rocked by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a until it abuts on the sliding protrusion 574. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the second recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding protrusion portion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517 a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are rotated. The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  As shown in FIG. 65 to FIG. 68, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall 5556a, When the non-transmission state is formed between the dynamic crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 5550, and the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member. A transmission state is formed with 5550.

  If the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 are provided. When the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall 5556b, a non-transmission state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550. It

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in the present embodiment, the rotation arm member 5550 is set between the retracted position (see FIG. 22) and the extended position without switching the swing direction of the rotation crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion of swinging between, the swinging arm member 5550 has a small width in the vicinity of the extended position (a lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between the positions U1 and U2). A rocking motion that is rocked can be formed.

  This makes it possible to cause the swing arm member 5550 to perform a swinging motion that is difficult to form by switching the drive direction of the drive device 560. That is, it is possible to form the swing arm member 5550 to perform a swinging motion with a small width in the vicinity of the extended position by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the swing motion depends on the switching speed of the drive device 560 in the drive direction. Further, even if the drive direction of the drive device 560 is switched in a state in which the swinging speed of the rotary arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the drive device 560 and the rotary arm member 5550 is large and the drive direction cannot be switched instantaneously. However, there is a possibility that the time required for switching the driving direction becomes long.

  On the other hand, in the swinging operation of the rotating arm member 5550 in the vicinity of the extended position in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, so that the time required for switching the driving direction is unnecessary. can do.

  In addition, the operation speed of the operation in which the rotating arm member 5550 is swung clockwise in the front view (upward swinging operation) depends on the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a, and the rotating arm member 5550 is not seen in the front view. The operation speed of the clockwise swing operation (downward swing operation) depends on the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, by increasing the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570, the swing speed of the rotating arm member 5550 near the extended position can be increased.

  As a result, it is possible to achieve both high-speed swing motion near the extended position of the rotary arm member 5550 and reduction of the swing direction switching time.

  Next, the combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary arm member 550 of the combined operation unit 500 is integrally molded has been described, but the rotary arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting two members. .. By the relative swinging of the two members, the attitude of the arcuate hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  69 (a) and 69 (c) are partial front views of the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 69 (b) is a rotating view in the direction of arrow LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). It is a partial top view of arm member 6550. Note that FIG. 69 (a) illustrates a state in which the tip posture of the tip swing member 6556 is formed in the first posture, and in FIG. 69 (b), the tip of the tip swing member 6556 moves downward. The state in which the second oriented posture is formed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 69A, the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to the main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end portion of the main body portion 6551. A tip swinging member 6556 and a switching device 6590 fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the main body portion 6551 to switch the posture of the tip swinging member 6556 are mainly provided. An arcuate hole 6554 is formed in the tip swing member 6556.

  The main body portion 6551 includes a shaft support hole 6551a which is formed in the other end portion in the front-rear direction and serves as a swing center of the tip swing member 6556.

  The tip swing member 6556 is formed in such a manner that the end portion on the side connected to the body portion 6551 sandwiches the body portion 6551 in the front and back, and a shaft support hole 6556a formed as a swing center of the tip swing member 6556. A shaft support rod 6556b, which is a rod member inserted through the shaft support hole 6556a and the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip swing member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arc-shaped hole 6554. The sliding shaft 6556c is mainly provided so as to project in the front-rear direction from the end of the section and is connected to the guide elongated hole 6591d of the switching device 6590.

  The arcuate hole 6554 includes a return portion 6554a that is provided so as to project on the inner surface on the upper side. The return portion 6554a is a portion that slides on the protruding portion 541b of the expansion and contraction effecting member 6540. When sliding from the tip side of the arcuate hole 6554, resistance is suppressed, while sliding in the opposite direction. It is a laterally asymmetrical projection that increases sliding resistance when moved.

  70 (a) and 70 (b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a pushed-up state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a pushed-down state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down with respect to the switch member 6592. Is illustrated. Further, the pushed-up state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (a).

  The C-shaped member 6591 has a long plate-shaped main body 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which the movable columnar portion 6592a can be inserted is formed, and an inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the hole formed in the main body 6591a. A cylindrical guide portion 6591b having a cylindrical shape and a groove formed on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and a main body portion 6591a extending downward from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6591a. It mainly includes a pair of arm portions 6591c and a guide elongated hole 6591d that is a long hole that is formed on the distal end side of the arm portion 6591c and that guides the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swing member 6556.

  The grooving formed on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular guide portion 6591b is grooving for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the moving columnar portion 6592a of the switch member 6592. Due to the groove processing, the C-shaped member 6591 is switched between a pushed-up state and a pushed-down state each time the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed in the direction in which it is pushed by the switch member 6592. In addition, illustration of other members such as a spring member that forms a biasing force necessary for forming the knock mechanism is omitted, and in the present embodiment, the tubular guide portion 6591b is the push-in portion 6541a of the expansion and contraction rendering device 6540 (see FIG. 71 (see 71).

  The switch member 6592 includes a movable columnar portion 6592a having a protrusion that is inserted from the cylindrical guide portion 6591a and is movable in a groove on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591a from the outer peripheral surface, and the movable cylindrical portion 6592a is an axis. A fixed plate portion 6592b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 is mainly provided.

  Here, in the knock mechanism, the relative position in the axial direction is switched while the tubular member and the columnar member guided on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member are relatively rotated. That is, when the tubular member and the columnar member do not rotate relative to each other, it becomes difficult to switch the relative position in the axial direction.

  On the other hand, the movable columnar portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is axially rotatably connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved in the direction approaching the switch member 6592 (when it is pushed downward in FIG. 70 (a)), the movable columnar portion 6592a is relatively rotatable with respect to the tubular guide portion 6591b. Then, the knock mechanism works.

  Therefore, it is possible to switch between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state without relatively rotating the fixed plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591. Therefore, the state of the switching device 6590 can be switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state while maintaining the state in which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip end swinging member 6556 is inserted into the guide elongated hole 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591. it can.

  71A and 71B are front views of the combined operation unit 6500. In FIG. 71 (a), a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the extended position and the switching device 6590 is pushed up is shown, and in FIG. K4, the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the extended position and switched. The condition in which the device 6590 is depressed is shown. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged at a position swung to the left end of the swingable range.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the state of the switching device 6590 is switched in a state where the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the projecting position, whereby the front-view timepiece of the stretch effect producing device 540. The maximum swing angle around can be switched.

  That is, when the switching device 6590 forms a push-up state (see FIG. 71 (a)), the projection 541 b of the expansion / contraction effecting member 6540 is brought into contact with the inner side surface on the upper side of the arcuate hole 6554 to cause the expansion / contraction effecting device 6540 to move. The swing angle is limited.

  At this position, the inner side surface of the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as stoppers, and even if the swing speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged in the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (a). It can be stopped suddenly (the movement locus RI of the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the return portion 6554a).

  On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms the depressed state (see FIG. 71 (b)), the projection portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (of the projection portion 541b). The movement locus RI is not brought into contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the protrusion 541b is discharged to the outside from the tip portion 554a of the arc-shaped hole 6554.

  Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in the front view until the rotary plate 520 comes into contact with the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71 (b)). In this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and even when the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 swings at a high speed, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be suddenly stopped.

  Thereby, it is possible to form a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) in a case where the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in the front view and the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is suddenly stopped. The variation of can be increased. In addition, when switching the state of the switching device 6590, the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the tubular guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 moves from the upper right portion when viewed from the front of the main body member 6541a to the right. It is generated by being pushed by the pushing portion 6541a extending in one direction. Therefore, since the second drive device 560 that causes the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 to swing is also used as a drive device that swings the tip swing member 6556, it is possible to reduce the number of drive devices that are provided.

  71 (a) and 71 (b), the swing range of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swing member 6556. In this case, since the swing angle is small, it is possible for the player not to notice the change.

  Here, when the player can visually recognize the rotating arm member 6550 (see FIG. 71), if the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the rotating arm member 6550, Expectation for the operation of the stretch effect device 6540 is weakened, and the attention level of the stretch effect device 6540 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swinging angle of the tip swinging member 6556 for changing the swinging angle of the expansion / contraction producing device 6540 is small, which makes it difficult for the player to notice the change. it can. As a result, the sense of expectation for the operation of the stretch effect device 6540 can be increased, and the attention level of the stretch effect device 6540 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a tilting operation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the elongated hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is supported in the sliding hole 643 so as to be guided is described. In the tilting operation unit 7600 in the form, the shaft support hole 7643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 7600, and the effect member 620 is supported in the shaft support hole 7643. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  72A and 72B are front views of the tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment. 72 (a) shows an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7643 of the transmission member 7640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, and FIG. 72 (b) shows the inverted state in FIG. 72 (b). The state where the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is illustrated. 72 (a) and 72 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the back side thereof are visible. The torsion spring 650 and the shaft support projection 612 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the base member 7610 has a sliding hole 7613 that is formed in the front-rear direction below the second shaft support hole 614 of the main body 611 in the vertical direction. The sliding hole 7613 is a long hole through which the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the longitudinal direction of the long hole is formed along the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is slidably supported in the sliding hole 7613.

  The transmission member 7640 has a shaft support hole 7643 formed at the end opposite to the end where the tubular portion 642 of the main body 641 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a portion that pivotally supports the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is bored with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding shaft portion 621a.

  The swinging motion of the effect member 620 is caused by the transmission member 7640 swinging around the second shaft support hole 614 by the rotation of the drive motor 631 of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 51).

  In the present embodiment, since the sliding shaft portion 621a is axially supported by the shaft support hole 7643, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 follows the swing locus of the transmission member 7640. (The sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted into the sliding hole 7613, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610.

  Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72B, when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72 <transfer swing Moving angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung by the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631, the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 7640. Thereby, the accuracy of adjusting the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71 can be made smaller than that in the first embodiment. explain.

  The connecting line J1 illustrated in FIG. 72 (b) is a line drawn from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626. The virtual connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and when the swing shaft portion 626 is arranged above the sliding hole 7613 from a line drawn through the tubular portion 642 in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641. It is a line drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 72A). The virtual angle φ73, which is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2, is the same as that of the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the sliding hole 7613. This corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the effect swing angle φ72 is made smaller than the virtual angle φ73, and according to the tilting operation unit 7600 of the seventh embodiment, the effect when the transmission member 7640 is swung by a predetermined angle. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung by the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the swing amount of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 is adjusted. The accuracy of can be improved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front rail portion 715 is formed of a single arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed of a plurality of arcs and the directions of adjacent arcs may be reversed (corrugated). In this case, since the slide movement speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed and the posture of the effect member 620 is made unstable, it is possible to perform an effect in which the effect member 620 is rattled.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the effect member 620 forms the inverted state, the case where the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is vertically above the first shaft support portion 613 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity may be arranged obliquely above the first pivot portion 613.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the upper surface of the cushioning rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 is horizontal in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the outer side in the width direction. In this case, the velocity of the sphere flowing into the upper surface of the lower left plate member 320 from the outside in the width direction of the board can be decelerated by the acceleration in the gravity direction, and the deceleration time of the sphere can be shortened.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed of a long hole has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sliding hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the positional deviation between the sliding hole 643 and the sliding shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by expanding and contracting the transmission member 640. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the position of the contact portion 644 can be switched between two positions has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously variable (movable). In this case, the change rate of the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the posture of the tip swing member 6556 changes in two positions has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the attitude change of the tip swing member 6556 may be generated in multiple stages. In this case, the amount of swing of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 can be formed in a plurality of types, and the variation of production can be increased.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot several times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time title, a three-time title, and May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variation display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and finally displayed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific ".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls that are dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Example of technical idea of changing driving force transmission by the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550>
The crank member is provided with a protrusion protruding from a position that is rotated about the first shaft and is eccentric to the first shaft, and an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted. The crank member is separated from the first position and the first position. An arm member movably formed between the second position and a drive device for generating a driving force for rotating the crank member about the first shaft are provided, and the insertion portion is inserted. The drive force is transmitted to the arm member by contacting the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protrusion portion with the protrusion portion, and the arm member is moved to the first position and the second position. A gaming machine, comprising: a transmission area movably formed between the position and a non-transmission area connected to the transmission area, the transmission of the driving force being interrupted. A1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, provided with a crank member including a protrusion that is provided at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft, and an arm member including an insertion portion through which the protrusion of the crank member is inserted. There is a game machine in which an arm member operates in conjunction with rotation of a crank member (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-000306). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked. Therefore, the arm member is driven from the time of starting the crank member, and it is not possible to shift the timing of starting the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member. In this case, when the crank member is started, a large force that overcomes the inertia of the crank member and the arm member is required, which causes a problem that the drive device becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes the transmission area and the non-transmission area connected to the transmission area, the crank portion is inserted in the non-transmission area. By starting the member, it is possible to shift the timing of driving the arm member and the timing of starting the crank member. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission region from the non-transmission region. As a result, the driving force required at the time of starting the crank member can be suppressed, and the size of the driving device can be reduced.

  The arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves in the non-transmission area. For example, when the arm member is moved, the case where it is moved by gravity or elastic force generated by an elastic spring for assistance is exemplified.

  In addition, as the insertion portion, a recess having a bottomed concave shape, a penetrating elongated hole, or the like is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the crank member is formed so as to be able to rotate for one rotation or more, and the insertion portion serves as the transmission area by rotating the crank member in one rotation direction, while the crank member is A gaming machine A2, comprising: a selection area that becomes the non-transmission area by being rotated in another rotation direction that is opposite to the one rotation direction.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the crank member. As a result, even if the rotational speed of the crank member is not changed, it is possible to form two speed modes of the arm member when the crank members are arranged in the same phase by reversing the direction of the driving force of the drive device. Therefore, the speed variation of the arm member can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the protrusion and an inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion that faces the moving direction of the protrusion when the crank member is rotated in the one rotation direction. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the selection area is formed by providing a spare portion.

  In addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 has the insertion area formed by the insertion portion having the allowance portion, so that it is possible to change the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member. The member can be eliminated and the material cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position and the second position is formed as an end position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the end position formed as the end position. When the arm member is arranged at either one of the second positions, the arm member is formed as the terminal position and is directed toward the other side opposite to either the first position or the second position. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that a bounce suppressing mechanism for suppressing movement is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, when the arm member is arranged at either one of the first position and the second position formed as the end position of the movable range of the arm member, It is possible to suppress the driving force that the drive device needs to generate in order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other side on the opposite side. Therefore, the durability of the drive device can be improved.

  As the bounce restraint mechanism, when the attractive force of the magnet is used, when the movement is restrained by a claw-shaped member, and when the load received by the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member, An example is a case where a member insertion portion is formed.

  When attracting with a magnet, the magnet is required as a separate member, but it is possible to generate attractive forces of various sizes depending on the internal composition of the magnet, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

  When the claw-shaped member restrains the movement, a drive device for operating the claw-shaped member is necessary, but the claw-shaped member can mechanically stop the movement of the arm member.

  When the insertion portion of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received by the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed toward the axis of the crank member, it is not necessary to dispose another member for suppressing movement of the arm member, Bounce of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the arm member is disposed at at least one of the first position and the second position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission region of the non-transmission region is A game machine A5 in which the bounce restraint mechanism is formed by being substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centering on the rotation axis of the crank member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is arranged at the first position or the second position. As a result, the change from the moving state of the arm member to the stopped state can be smoothly formed.

  Further, in the bounce restraint mechanism, the load applied from the insertion portion to the protrusion is directed to the rotation axis of the crank member, so that the load can be restrained in the rotation direction of the crank member and the burden on the drive device can be restrained. can do.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission region of the non-transmission region is the crank member. The circumscribed circle of the protrusion centering on the rotation axis is substantially the same, a biasing force for moving the arm member from the first position to the second position is applied, and the non-transmission area of the insertion part is At least one of an inner recessed portion protruding inside the insertion portion or an outer recessed portion protruding outside the insertion portion is formed in a size capable of accommodating the protrusion portion on the side surface on the first position side. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission area of the non-transmission area Is approximately the same as the circumscribing circle of the protrusion around the rotation axis of the crank member, and the biasing force that moves the arm member from the first position to the second position is applied to the arm member. In this case, the protrusion of the crank member is arranged in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, so that the movement of the arm member is prevented by the protrusion and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved in the non-transmission region so that the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess face each other, the arm member is moved. That is, when the protrusion is arranged to face the inner recess, the inner recess is pushed out by the protrusion and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. When the protrusion is arranged to face the outer recess, the protrusion is housed in the outer recess and the arm member is moved to the crank member side.

  As a result, the protrusion of the crank member moves in the non-transmission region, and the movement of the arm member has a different movement width from the movement of the arm member that occurs when the protrusion moves in the transmission region due to rotation of the crank member. Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving device and change the movement width of the arm member at the same time.

  That is, in order to change the movement width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the drive device according to the movement width of the arm member. In this case, the control load on the drive device increases, and it is difficult to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, the protrusion of the crank member is moved in the non-transmission area and the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, whereby movements of the arm members having different movement widths are formed. It Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. In addition, by narrowing the formation interval of the adjacent inner recesses or outer recesses, it is possible to cause the arm member to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

  The mode in which the protrusion can be accommodated may be a mode in which the entire protrusion is included in the recess, or a part in which the protrusion is included in the recess.

<An example of a technical idea of limiting the swing width of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 with the arcuate hole 554>
A movable member that can be moved along a predetermined movement locus and that can be arranged at mutually different first and second positions, and the movable member that moves in correspondence with the movable member and abuts on the movable member. A stopper member that restricts the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second position. And a gaming machine B1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes a movable member that is movably formed and a stopper member that limits a moving width of the movable member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the stopper member is fixed immovably, so that the stopper member is separately prepared when the movable member is arranged at the first position and when it is arranged at the second position. However, there is a problem that the space for disposing the stopper member becomes wide.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the stopper member moves corresponding to the movable member, the stopper member when the movable member is arranged in the first position is arranged in the second position. In this case, it can also be used as a stopper member. Thereby, the space for disposing the stopper member can be suppressed.

  Further, the stopper member changes the moving width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second member, so that the variation of the moving width of the movable member is increased. be able to.

  Examples of the stopper member include a projection portion that is provided so as to project from the transmission member and is brought into contact with the movable member, an inner wall portion of a recess that is provided in the transmission member and that houses a part of the movable member, and the like.

  Note that examples of the movement mode include linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, swinging, and rotational movement. In addition, the movement width in each mode of movement means, for example, an actual movement distance or a straight distance between two points in the case of linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, etc. In the case of etc., it means an actual moving distance, a moving angle, or the like.

  In the gaming machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is swingably supported by a first shaft and that expands and contracts in a radial direction of the first shaft, and the first position and the second position are different from each other. In the case where the intermediate member has different expansion and contraction lengths, the predetermined movement locus is formed in an arc shape with the first axis as a center, and the stopper member is in a case where the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion and contraction state. A gaming machine B2, wherein the movable member is extended along the predetermined movement locus.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the movable member is pivotally supported about the first shaft and is formed so as to be capable of expanding and contracting in the radial direction of the first shaft. It has a member. Therefore, the radius of curvature of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member about the first axis can be changed depending on the length of the intermediate member in the expansion / contraction direction.

  Here, the stopper member is extended along a predetermined movement locus of the movable member when the intermediate member is in the predetermined expanded / contracted state (the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member in the predetermined expanded / contracted state). And the curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member is the same). In this case, the movable member is moved along the stopper member and the movable member can be moved in the extending direction of the stopper member when the intermediate member is expanded and contracted to a predetermined state. Therefore, the moving width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

  On the other hand, when the intermediate member is set in a stretched state different from the predetermined stretched state, the curvature of the predetermined moving path of the movable member and the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member can be made different, and the predetermined movement of the movable member can be made. The locus and the extending direction of the stopper member can intersect. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be changed by changing the expansion / contraction state of the intermediate member.

  In the gaming machine B2, the movable member includes a protrusion that projects toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted, and the protrusion is in the insertion portion. The gaming machine B3, wherein the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with each other in the expansion and contraction direction of the intermediate member in the inserted state, and the movable member is brought into contact with the insertion portion.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with the expansion and contraction direction of the intermediate member by inserting the protrusion of the movable member into the insertion portion of the stopper member. The drive device for expanding and contracting the movable member and the drive device for moving the stopper member can be combined. Further, the insertion portion regulates the movement of the movable member by being brought into contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper for restricting the movement of the movable member and a function for interlocking the movable member and the stopper member. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

  In the gaming machine B3, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side due to the expansion and contraction operation of the intermediate member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the expansion and contraction operation of the intermediate member reverses the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side. Accordingly, the moving width of the movable member can be changed depending on whether the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion part or when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion part.

  That is, when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement trajectory of the protrusion when the movable member moves along a predetermined movement trajectory follows the shape of the insertion portion), The movement locus and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the projection portion when the movable member is moved along a predetermined movement locus is substantially the reverse of the shape of the insertion portion), the projection portion The angle formed by the locus of movement of the movable member and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion is increased, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so that its posture can be changed while maintaining the stretchable state of the intermediate member, and the posture of the insertion portion changes so that the contact position between the movable member and the insertion portion. The game machine B5 is characterized in that the movement width of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the contact position between the movable member and the inserting portion is changed by changing the posture of the inserting portion while maintaining the stretchable state of the intermediate member. In this case, the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion includes a groove portion that allows the protrusion portion to move in and out along the movement trajectory, and the protrusion portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion. A gaming machine B6, which is capable of forming a state, and in which the movable member includes a positioning assisting portion that is engaged with the stopper member in the separated state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the protruding portion can be formed in a separated state in which the protruding portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion, and the movable member is in the separated state. A positioning assisting portion that engages with the stopper member is provided. Therefore, the formation range of the stopper member can be made smaller than the operating range of the movable member, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the positional deviation between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be achieved. Can be prevented. That is, even if the protruding portion is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member is suppressed by the positioning assisting portion, so that the protrusion portion can be returned to the insertion portion again.

<An example of a technical idea of supporting the production member 620 supported upside down by two points>
A base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member and moves upward from a predetermined position, a drive device that generates a driving force for displacing the movable member, and the movable member. And a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated from the drive device to the movable member, the transmission member is pivotally supported by a shaft support portion formed on the base member, The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the length from the shaft supporting portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the supporting portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmitting member. ..

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that drives a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on a base member and that moves upward from a predetermined position by transmission of driving force by a gear (for example, (See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when operating the driving device in the minimum unit of resolution of control of the driving device (for example, one step in a stepping motor) is the supporting portion of the movable member. To the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the movable member as the center of gravity of the movable member moves away from the support portion in the radial direction.

  Further, when the center of gravity of the movable member shifts to one side from the inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion, a driving force for displacing the movable member in the opposite direction is generated to invert the movable member. Even if an attempt is made to maintain the state, if the center of gravity shifts to the other side due to the driving force, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity coincide, and the movable member is largely displaced.

  Therefore, as the movable member becomes longer in the radial direction of the support portion, there is a problem that it becomes more difficult to stop the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the drive device to the movable member to move the movable member upward is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion of the base member and is coupled to the movable member. The length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the shaft supporting portion is formed shorter than the length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the supporting portion. Therefore, even if the movable member is long in the radial direction of the support portion, it is possible to suppress the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when operating the drive device in the minimum unit of control resolution of the drive device. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the movable member stand still in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

  The manner in which the movable member is supported by the base member includes a manner in which the movable member is pivotally supported by the base member, a manner in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, and A combined mode and the like are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission member has a shorter arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, as the movable member displaced around the support portion moves upward from the predetermined position, the transmission member from the pivotal support portion to the connecting position with the movable member is moved. Arm length is reduced. Therefore, compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved.

  For example, when the driving device that rotates the transmission member operates at a constant number of rotations, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is the first length. The description will be made assuming that the second length is shorter than the second length. When the number of rotations of the drive device is constant, the case where the transmission member is fixed at the first length is longer than the case where the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at the second length. The moving speed of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes faster when the members are arranged in a predetermined phase.

  Here, in the vicinity of a predetermined position, the movable member is quickly operated at the speed generated when the transmission member has the first arm length, and in the vicinity of the inverted state, the speed generated when the transmission member has the second arm length. Consider the case where you want to move the movable member slowly. As a method therefor, a method of changing the rotation speed of the drive device on the way can be considered, but it cannot be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotation speed of the drive device. Further, even if the rotation speed of the drive device can be changed, in order to change the rotation speed midway, a detection sensor for detecting the timing of the change is required, which causes a problem of high cost. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the arm length from the pivotally supported portion of the transmission member that is pivotally supported to the coupling position between the transmission member and the movable member is such that the transmission member has a predetermined position. It is formed in such a manner that it is shortened as it moves upward from. Therefore, the transmission member can have the first arm length near the predetermined position, and the transmission member can have the second arm length near the inverted position, so that the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. ..

  An example of a configuration in which the arm length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the transmission member and the movable member is fixed is a case where a protrusion protruding from the transmission member is inserted into the movable member and connected. It Further, as a configuration in which the arm length can be changed, a long hole is formed in the transmission member, and a protrusion protruding from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member, or the movable member is movable. An example is a case where the member is provided with a long hole in a portion supported by the support portion and an insertion shaft rod that is inserted into the long hole is formed from the base member.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the movable member is provided with a protrusion that protrudes in a direction parallel to the support portion, and the transmission member is an elongated hole that extends in the radial direction of the shaft support portion. A gaming machine C3, characterized in that the gaming machine C3 is provided with an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted.

  In the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion is extended in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the projection portion of the transmission member is inserted into the insertion portion so that the transmission member and the movable member are formed. Are coupled, the movement direction of the coupling position is limited to the radial direction of the shaft support portion. Therefore, along with the swing of the transmission arm, the length from the shaft supporting portion to the connecting position of the transmission member with the movable member can be mechanically changed.

  Examples of the insertion portion include a long hole that is formed through and a recessed portion that is formed as a bottomed recess.

  In the gaming machine C3, the pivotal support portion is disposed vertically above the support portion, and the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed on a straight line connecting the support portion and the protrusion portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, when the movable member takes a posture of arranging the protruding portion vertically above the supporting portion, the centers of gravity of the supporting portion, the shaft support portion, the protruding portion, and the movable member are It is formed on the vertical line. In this case, the gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is vertically downwardly applied to the support portion and the shaft support portion. Therefore, since the force in the rotational direction is not applied to the movable member, the posture of the movable member can be maintained even if the power of the drive device is shut off. As a result, the load on the drive device can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is provided between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is decelerated by the worm gear.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is provided between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is decelerated by the worm gear, so that the drive device is controlled. It is possible to significantly reduce the moving width of the movable member when operating in the minimum unit of resolution. In addition, since the force transmission direction through the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive unit side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to the load from the transmission member side, and the drive unit It is possible to reduce the load on the drive device when the drive is stopped.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a biasing device that generates a biasing force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member is provided. The gaming machine C6, wherein the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the displacement direction in an inverted state in which the movable member is disposed vertically above the support portion, and the displacement increases as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the urging device generates an urging force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion, and the urging force is the center of gravity of the movable member. It becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the state (inverted state) arranged vertically above the support portion. That is, the urging force can be minimized in the inverted state.

  Therefore, by increasing the biasing force when the movable member is moved upward from the predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive device that moves the movable member upward from the state in which the movable member is arranged at the predetermined position.

  Further, the urging force is generated bidirectionally in the displacement direction of the movable member, and balances in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved upward from the predetermined position and the drive device is stopped and controlled, the posture of the movable member is inverted due to the urging force even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes the inverted state. Can be sent to. Thereby, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in the inverted state.

  In the gaming machine C6, the movable member is capable of forming a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced from above the supporting portion in the vertical direction by a predetermined amount, and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by the predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine C7, wherein the second state has a larger change rate of the biasing force when the displacement is the same as compared with the one state.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the movable member is larger than the predetermined amount from the inverted state than the first state on the inverted state side in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support portion. In the displaced second state, the change rate of the biasing force when the displacement is the same becomes larger. In this case, when starting the movable member from the state in which the movable member is arranged in the second state, it is possible to suppress the load at the time of starting the drive device. Further, since the acceleration of the movable member when the movable member is arranged near the inverted state can be reduced, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in the inverted state.

<One example of technical idea in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during the swing>
A movable member that is movable between the first position and the second position, a drive device that generates a driving force that moves the movable member, and a biasing force that returns the movable member to the first position. In a gaming machine including an urging device for generating the movable member, the movable member is movable with respect to a change ratio of the urging force generated when the movable member is arranged in the first urging region from the first position to a predetermined position. A large change rate of the biasing force is generated when the member is arranged in the second biasing region that is formed to be separated from the first position and is a region that is connected to the first biasing region. A gaming machine D1 characterized by the above.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that uses an urging force of an urging device such as an elastic spring as an assisting force when the movable member is moved by a driving force generated by a driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011). (See JP-A-120640). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the urging force of the urging device is proportionally increased by the displacement amount of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the urging device by disposing the movable member. There was a problem that was. That is, it is difficult to make the movement of the movable member supple by suppressing the urging force in a certain area, and to increase the urging force to make the movement of the movable member abrupt in another area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the change rate of the biasing force biased toward the first position is greater than that when the movable member is arranged in the first biasing region. It is made larger when it is arranged in the active area. That is, for example, when the movable member stopped at the second position is started toward the first position (second urging region), sufficient urging force can be obtained by the urging device, while the movable member moves to the first position. When the movable member is arranged in the urging region, the change of the urging force is suppressed and the operation of the movable member can be made supple (gradually).

  As a mode in which the change rate of the urging force of the urging device is changed by the arrangement of the movable member, when the number of the urging devices that generate the urging amount in the movable member is increased or the urging device is An example is a case where the elastic spring is formed of an elastic spring and the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed by the arrangement of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine D1, the urging device is a pair of long members that are respectively arranged on a pair of surfaces that intersect the moving direction of the movable member and sandwich the movable member in the moving direction, and one end thereof. Parts are arranged opposite to each other on both sides of the movable member, and the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end, is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is A main body portion sandwiched between a pair of long members, and at least one of the pair of long members formed on the opposite side of the main body portion with respect to the pair of long members and in the moving direction of the main body portion. An abutting portion formed so as to be capable of contacting, the abutting portion being coupled and fixed to the movable member, and the movable member being disposed in the first urging region, the movable member is Of the long members of the Is contacted with one of the long members on the side closer to the movable member and is given an urging force. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being provided.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the change in the rate of change of the biasing force by the biasing device is shifted for the contact of the movable member and the pair of elongated members for each elongated member. It can be formed by that. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the urging force of the urging device by control or to prepare another member for improving the urging force.

  That is, since the other ends of the pair of long members are restricted from moving, one long member on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moves, The other elongated member on the opposite side receives no force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first biasing region, when the movable member moves, the other long member arranged on the opposite side of the moving direction of the movable member stays in place.

  On the other hand, in the second urging region, the movable member is moved so that the other elongated member is brought into contact with the contact portion. As a result, the biasing force is also generated from the other long member. Therefore, the biasing force applied to the movable member in the second biasing region can be increased.

  Examples of the elastic spring include a coil spring, a torsion spring, a leaf spring and the like.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging device is a pair of long members that are respectively arranged on a pair of surfaces that intersect the moving direction of the movable member and sandwich the movable member in the moving direction. End portions of the movable member are arranged opposite to each other on both side surfaces of the movable member, and the other end portion opposite to the one end portion is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed. A body portion sandwiched between the pair of elongated members, and at least one of the pair of elongated members formed on the opposite side of the body portion with respect to the pair of elongated members and in the moving direction of the body portion. And an abutting portion formed so as to be able to abut, the abutting portion being coupled and fixed to the movable member, and the movable member being arranged in the first urging region, the movable member, The movable member of the pair of long members When the movable member is brought into contact with one of the long members on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement and is given a biasing force, and the movable member is arranged in the second biasing region, the one long member is moved. The game machine D3 is characterized in that an intermediate portion of the above is pressed against an abutting portion arranged on the side of one of the elongated members with respect to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the change in the change rate of the biasing force is formed by pressing the intermediate portion of one of the long members against the contact portion. That is, one elongate member that has already been deformed by the movement of the movable member is further deformed with the intermediate portion pressed against the contact portion as the starting point, so that the change rate of the biasing force changes. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subjected to the deformation becomes shorter than the deformation starting from the other end, so that the rate of change of the urging force with respect to the moving amount of the movable member is Increase. Thereby, in the second biasing region, it is possible to increase the change in the biasing force with respect to the moving amount of the movable member. Therefore, the change rate of the biasing force can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D3, the one long member includes a first bending point that is bent toward the abutting portion side which is arranged to face each other, and the one long member is at the first bending point. A game machine D4, which is pressed against the contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, one long member is brought into contact with the abutting portion which is arranged to face each other at the first bending point, so that one long member is brought into contact. It is stretched by the contact with the section. Therefore, the tip end portion of the biasing device that applies the biasing force to the movable member can be separated from the other end of the long member that is the starting point of the biasing force or the first bending point. Therefore, the moment that the movable member is loaded from the biasing device in the second biasing region can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D4, the movable member includes a tip enlarged region that is enlarged in the moving direction as it moves away from the other end of the elongated member, and one of the movable member and the elongated member is in the tip enlarged region. A gaming machine D5, which is abutted against the end of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged region, and the movable member and one end of the elongated member are in contact with each other in the tip enlarged region. Therefore, when one elongate member is extended by pressing one elongate member against the contact portion, the contact position between the movable member and the elongate member separates from the other end of the elongate member. And the amount of deformation of the long member is increased. Therefore, the urging force applied from the urging device to the movable member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed, and the gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, it is possible to increase the variation of the change in the biasing force generated by the long member. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the biasing force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<Example of technical idea in which buffer ribs 322 are formed on the lower plate 320 by providing a plurality of outlets>
Inside the game area in which the ball can be flowed down, the in-board accessory placed in contact with the lower edge of the game area and the ball formed on one side of the board in the width direction A first outlet which is an opening for discharging from the area, and a second outlet which is an opening for discharging a ball from the game area, which is formed on the other side in the width direction of the board accessory which is the opposite side to the one side in the width direction. In the gaming machine provided with, the first out opening and the second out opening include a lower plate portion that extends from the lower side surface of the opening to the front surface and has a guide surface on the upper surface, and the guide of the lower plate portion. The surface includes a buffer rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the corresponding side of the first out opening or the second out opening, and is formed by being raised from the guide surface on the outer side in the width direction. The cushion ribs so that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs is directed outward in the width direction. Gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is formed smaller.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of outlets are provided (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-192301). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is preferable to suppress the size of each out port as the number of out ports increases, because it is possible to secure the installation space for attackers and the like, while the out port is too small, There was a problem that the discharge of game balls might be delayed.

  For example, if the height at which the ball bounces up and down on the front side of the outlet is equal to or greater than the vertical width of the outlet, the ball stays in front of the outlet. Further, for example, when the side surface is disposed on the side surface of the outlet in the width direction to form a wall, the sphere that flows into the front side of the outlet from the width direction collides with the side surface of the character and bounces back in the width direction. At this time, when the amount of bounce in the width direction becomes equal to or larger than the lateral width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the buffer rib is formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate portion, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the ball and to decelerate the ball. That is, when the sphere collides from the up and down direction, the cushioning rib flexes and deforms, and the cushioning rib serves as a cushion to suppress the rebound of the sphere. Further, when the balls collide from the left and right directions, the balls fit into the buffer ribs and are braked.

  Here, the cushioning rib extending in the opening direction is weak against the load from the left and right directions and may be damaged by the collision of the balls from the left and right directions.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the guide surface has the step portion on the outer side in the width direction, the ball flowing down from the left-right direction toward the buffer rib falls from the step portion onto the buffer rib. .. In this case, the vertical component of the direction of collision of the ball with the buffer rib can be increased, and damage to the buffer rib can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the stepped portion has a function of stopping the ball moving left and right on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the ball moving on the guide surface from bouncing beyond the lateral width of the outlet.

  Since the buffer ribs are formed higher toward the center of the game area in the width direction, it is possible to obtain a large rebound suppressing effect in the vicinity of the center of the game area in the width direction in which the flowing balls are easily concentrated. As a result, the ball can be smoothly discharged from the outlet. Further, by aligning the curve of the lower side of the game area with the lower surface of the buffer rib, it is possible to correct the position of the out port downward.

  Here, the higher the formation height of the buffer ribs, the greater the effect of suppressing the rebound of the sphere is because the amount of bending of the buffer ribs increases. That is, the larger the amount of bending of the buffer ribs is, the more the cushioning effect is exerted, and the rebound can be suppressed more easily. Therefore, it is preferable to keep the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs constant in the left-right direction (make the length in the vertical direction constant) for the effect of suppressing rebound.

  On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs is made constant (the length in the vertical direction is made constant), it is necessary to increase the formation height of the step portion, and the path of the ball to reach the step portion is also upward. Since it is necessary to arrange the game area, the game area is narrowed as a result, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer ribs is made smaller outside the width direction of the game area where the flowing down balls are less likely to concentrate, and the center of the game area in the width direction where the flowing down balls are likely to concentrate. Then, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer rib is increased. This makes it possible to improve the discharge efficiency of the balls and secure the game area at the same time.

  In addition, extending in the opening direction is not particularly limited, and means extending in the opening direction in a shape such as a linear shape, a corrugated shape, or a mountain shape.

  In the gaming machine E1, the guiding surface is provided with an outer sloping portion that descends and leans outward in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the guide surface has the outer inclined portion, so that the velocity of the sphere flowing into the guide face from the outer side in the width direction can be decelerated by gravitational acceleration. The deceleration time can be shortened.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a non-flowing-down area in which a ball cannot flow down is formed diagonally above at least one of the first out opening and the second out opening.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the downward flow of the ball flowing diagonally downward from the non-downflow area toward the guide surface is restricted, so the downward flow of the ball to the guide surface is achieved. The number of paths can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to narrow the rebounding direction of the falling ball. Thereby, the outer shape of at least one of the first out port and the second out port can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine E3, in the non-flow-down area, an opening / closing device arranged in the game area and capable of opening and closing to the front side is arranged above at least one of the first out opening and the second out opening. The gaming machine E4, which is formed on the front side of the opening / closing device.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the non-flow-down area is formed by the opening / closing device. Accordingly, the space generated by suppressing the opening dimension of the first out port or the second out port toward the non-flow-down region side can be used as the installation space for the opening / closing device.

  Further, the switchgear allows the ball flowing down in the front of the switchgear to flow down below the game area in the closed state, and moves the ball flowing down in front of the switchgear to the rear of the game area in the open state. It has the function of flowing down. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form the non-flow-down region as compared with the case where the balls flow irregularly due to collision with a nail or the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a gaming machine E5 characterized in that a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first out opening or the second out opening.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is provided with the direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the upper bottom surface of the first out opening or the second out opening. It is possible to suppress the resistance to the ball flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning the prize (or passing through the operating port), there is a condition that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow a ball to be won, and a value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board 65 1st variable winning a prize device (opening and closing device)
313 Movable performance member (in-board accessory)
314 1st out port 315 2nd out port 315a Guide rib (direction adjustment rib)
320 Lower left plate member (lower plate part)
322 Buffer rib 324 Step 330 Right lower plate member (lower plate)
332 cushioning rib 512 first shaft portion (first shaft)
540, 6540 Expansion / contraction production device (movable member)
541 Main body member (part of intermediate member)
544 Slide plate (part of intermediate member)
545 Slide rail (part of intermediate member)
541b Projection portion 541e Guide fastening portion (positioning assistance portion)
550, 5550, 6550 Rotating arm member (arm member, stopper member)
553 Deformed slot (insertion part)
553d Selection wall section (selection area)
554 Arc-shaped hole (insertion part)
554a Mouth (groove)
554b First stopper surface (part of insertion portion)
554c Second stopper surface (part of insertion part)
560 Second drive device (drive device)
570 Rotating crank member (crank member)
574 Sliding protrusion (projection)
610, 7610 Base member 613 First shaft support hole (support portion)
614 Second shaft support hole (shaft support)
620, 4620 Performance member (movable member)
621a Sliding shaft (projection)
630 First drive device (drive device)
640, 2640, 3640, 4640, 7640 Transmission member (transmission member, movable member)
641, 2641, 3641 Main body 643 Sliding hole (insertion part)
644 Contact part 650 Torsional spring (biasing device, elastic spring)
652 Biasing arm (long member)
653a Bent portion (first bending point)
3641a Inclined side surface (tip enlarged area)
5556 Recessed part (outer recess)
7613 Sliding hole (support part)
7643 Shaft support hole (insertion part)
D margin

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, there is a gaming machine for driving kinematic movement means which is movably supported on the supporting lifting unit (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-120640, A

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the operation of the moving means .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the movement means operates well.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this object, a predetermined member, moving means that will be movably supported on the first support portion that is disposed on the predetermined member, driving for moving the moving means a drive device for generating a force, the is abutted against the moving means, and transmission means for transmitting a driving force generated from the driving unit to the mobile unit, the urging means for urging said moving means to a predetermined position When, a gaming machine having a said transmission means, wherein the predetermined member is rotated movably supported by the second supporting portion which is disposed, those from the first support portion of said moving means and said transmission means compared to the length to the contact position, the length from the second support portion to the contact position is short rather configuration, the contact position, based on the second supporting portion, wherein the first support The urging means is arranged on a side different from the side on which the part is arranged. It comprises one side and a pair of placement portion disposed on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operation of the moving means can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board and a board lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board lower part unit. (A) is a front view of a base member, a 1st out mouth, a 2nd out mouth, a lower left board member, and a lower right board member, (b) is a base member in the XVb-XVb line of Drawing 15 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a lower left plate member. It is a front perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front view of a vertical movement unit. It is a front view of a vertical movement unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an expansion-contraction effect device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction production device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line of the protrusion. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a tilt operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an effect member and a second drive device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the swing angle of the production | generation member with respect to the swing angle of a transmission member. It is a front view of a tilt operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front view of a tilt operation unit and a slide operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and the torsion spring in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and the torsion spring in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a rear perspective view of the transmission member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a rear perspective view of a moving contact member. (A) And (b) is a rear perspective view of a transmission member, (c) and (d) are top views of a transmission member. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the main body member of the effect member typically. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a front view of the compound action unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a partial front view of the rotating arm member in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a partial top view of the rotating arm member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIXb in (a) of FIG. 69, (c) 8] is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a switching device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound motion unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the tilting motion unit in 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (gaming ball) flows down in front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, or the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, a general prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the front surface side of the base plate 60 on the rear surface side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. Further, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the board lower unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. While being attenuated, it is bounced back toward the center.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while on the other hand, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync, by the lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device indicates a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  The "high probability state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) in the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probable change or during the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is generated by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") which performs variable display, and an LED which variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditors product 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

  In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big hit, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, toward the second winning port 640, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64, and a first specific winning port 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. A second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the variable display device 80, and a second circular winning device 63, 64, 640 having a circular shape having the same size as the other winning holes 63, 64, 640 is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop pattern and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a which are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b (for opening and closing rightward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). 15 (only the outer shape is shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the closed state and the closed state of are alternately repeated.

  Specifically, the second variable winning a prize device 650 is for opening and closing the triangular opening and closing plate in front view, which is arranged to the left of the second specific winning port 650a, and driving the opening and closing to the left with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. And a large opening solenoid (not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the left, and temporarily forms an open state in which the ball easily wins the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the state.

  In the present embodiment, since it is possible to win a ball in the second variable winning device 650 by performing a left-handed stroke, it is possible to eliminate the trouble of switching between a left-handed stroke and a right-handed stroke each time the game state changes. can do.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided with a large opening which is opened and closed separately in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is lit, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a in response to the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a, 650a during a predetermined time, You may make it the game state opened a predetermined number of times as a special game state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, It is not limited to the left side of the variable display device 80, but may be below the first winning opening 64, for example.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 314 and a second outlet 315. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 314 or the second out opening 315, not shown. You will be guided to the road. The first outlet 314 is arranged on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, while the second outlet 315 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64. That is, the second outlet 315 is arranged on the opposite side of the first outlet 314 with the first winning opening 64 interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 2) from the first winning opening 64 is the inner rail 61. Or, it flows down along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second outlet port 315, while being on the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side in front view with respect to the first winning port 64. The reached ball is made to flow down along the inclination (curve) of the inner rail 61, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (fire control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device, by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmitting / receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the payout control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open / close and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 431, 466, 531, 561, 631, 661, 751.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear surface image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear surface image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a housing structure of the respective units 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operating unit 200 when the exploded operating unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates the combined operation unit 500 mounted on the rear case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, in the operation unit 200, one surface side (front side in FIG. 6) is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. The rear case 210 is formed in a box shape. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211 a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  The operation unit 200 accommodates the vertical operation unit 400, the combined operation unit 500, the tilting operation unit 600, and the slide operation unit 700 in the internal space of the rear case 210, and is configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the combined operation unit 500 is disposed in the upper right portion of the area formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged below the region formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210. Further, in contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the vertical operation unit 400 is arranged on the front side of the composite operation unit 500 in a stacked and stacked state and accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the other operation unit (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) is arranged in a stacked state in which the predetermined operation unit (for example, the composite operation unit 500) and the other operation unit (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) are superposed on the front side. Therefore, the predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in the front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light transmissive material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, a predetermined operation unit is provided. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary portion of the above, and to shield the other portion from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved. ..

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the vertical operation unit 400, the combined operation unit 500, the tilting operation unit 600, and the slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 are referred to as appropriate.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. It should be noted that in FIG. 8, the state in which the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged in the projecting position is shown, and in FIG. 9, the expansion / contraction producing device 540 (see FIG. 26) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state. The formed state is shown in FIG. 10 in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged substantially at the center in the width direction.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical movement unit 400 operates the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). ) Is placed.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the combined operation unit 500, the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) is arranged in the projecting position in which it projects downward, and the front plate member 546 is located at the center of the opening 211 a of the rear case 210 (that is, The front side of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2), and the extended state where the rotating arm member 550 is retracted upward, and the front plate member 546 is located at the opening 211a of the rear case 210. A reduced state (see FIG. 5) retracted upward can be formed. In the contracted state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the tilting operation unit 600, the supporting member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the sliding operation unit 700 is slid to the left and right, so that the retracted position shown in FIG. It is movable to and from the position. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting movement unit 600 is retracted to the outside right of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is visually recognized by the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  Note that FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened and the internal liquid crystal device is visually recognized. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) visually recognized through the opening 211a and the liquid crystal device inside the tilting operation unit 600. It is possible for the player to visually recognize both of the effects displayed in.

  Each of these operation units 400 to 700 is formed so as to be independently operable and, as described above, is arranged in a stacked (stacked) state. In the case where the layers are arranged in different layers, the operation members can be simultaneously operated even if they are in a mode of projecting inwardly of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, not only each of the operation units 400 to 700 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. Note that, in FIG. 11, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in an expanded state, the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400 are arranged at the projecting position, and the door member 470 is provided. Are opened.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the front plate member 546 of the combined operation unit 500 is visually recognized through the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400. Since the lens member 460 is formed with a magnifying lens as described later, the front plate member 546 is magnified.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 11, the rotary plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the combined operation unit 500 is swung about the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved up and down. When the front plate member 546 is moved to a position (see FIG. 39) away from the lens member 470 of FIG. As a result, it is possible to switch between a state in which the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size and a state in which the front plate member 546 is magnified (see FIG. 11), and it is possible to improve the effect.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state, the tilting operation unit 600 is in the retracted position and is in the tilted state, and the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are shown. The state just before and abutting is illustrated. By further tilting the tilting operation unit 600, the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the complex motion unit 500 clockwise in the front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to perform an effect as if the tilt motion unit 600 exerts a force on the complex motion unit 500. (It is possible to correlate the movements of the units with each other to perform more complex effects). Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Next, the board lower unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface 13 and the board surface lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 13, in the lower part of the game board 13, a receiving opening 13a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and the board lower part unit 300 is inserted.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the board lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 14, the board surface lower unit 300 includes a base member 310 which is fitted and fixed in the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13, and a ball which is arranged at the lower left of the base member 310 in a front view and has a first out port. A lower left plate member 320 that guides to 314, a lower right plate member 330 that is disposed on the lower right side of the base member 310 in a front view and that guides the ball to the second out port 315, and a lower left plate that is fastened and fixed to the base member 310 from the front side. The member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 mainly include a front lid member 340 pivotally supported by an insertion shaft 343.

  The base member 310 has a plate-shaped main body portion 311 formed in a cross-sectional shape slightly smaller than the shape of the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and slightly smaller than the receiving opening 13a, and the front side of the main body portion 311. A decorative front plate portion 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, a movable effect member 313 attached to a substantially central portion in the width direction of the decorative front plate portion 312, and a movable effect member 313 formed on the left side in a front view. Mainly includes a first out opening 314 that is a rectangular hole and a second out opening 315 that is a rectangular hole formed to the right of the movable effect member 313 in a front view.

  The movable effect member 313 includes a rotation effect member 313a which is arranged at the lower center edge of the game board 13 in the width direction and is rotated by a drive device (not shown). Here, when the outlet is arranged at the lower edge of the width direction center of the game board 13, the movable effect member 313 cannot be arranged at the lower edge of the width direction center of the game board 13. In the present embodiment, the out port is not provided at the lower edge of the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, and the first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are provided at positions left and right from the center of the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to secure a space for disposing the movable effect member 313 on the lower edge of the center of the game board 13 in the width direction.

  The shapes of the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. FIG. 15A is a front view of the base member 310, the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the base member 310 and the lower left plate member 320 taken along line XVb-XVb in FIG. Note that FIG. 15A illustrates the outer shape of the front lid member 340 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 310, and the nails formed above the first out port 314 and the second out port 315.

  The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. The second out port 315 has a shorter formation length in the width direction than the first out port 314. The reason will be described later. In addition, a guide rib 315a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner surface of the second outlet 315. The guide rib 315a makes it possible to suppress the resistance applied to the sphere when the sphere flowing into the second out port 315 hits high and collides with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315. Further, the flow of the balls discharged from the second outlet 315 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, and variation in the direction of the discharged balls can be suppressed.

  Further, the buffer ribs 322 of the lower left plate member 320 described later are formed higher toward the center of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) in the width direction (see FIG. 15A). Thereby, even in the present embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area increases toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the effect of suppressing the rebound of the ball falling on the lower left plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the higher the drop height of the ball, so there is a possibility that the impact when the dropped ball collides with the lower left plate member 320 will increase. On the other hand, since the buffer ribs 322 are formed higher toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the buffer ribs 322 are bent closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, thereby cushioning the impact of the fall. The degree can be increased.

  Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling balls will be described. For example, when a ball landing on the cushioning ribs 322 and 332 has a high drop height, but the frequency at which the ball reaches the position is extremely low, even if the bounce of the ball is not suppressed, the discharge of another ball is obstructed. It may not be. Even in this case, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is increased, the space in the game area is unnecessarily suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the cushioning ribs 322 and 332 is set not only in the drop height of the ball but also in the relationship between the drop height and the frequency of landing of the ball at that position.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the spheres flowing down above the cushioning ribs 322 and 332 are started to flow down on the paths c1 and c2, and then reach the landing areas z0 to z4 via a plurality of branches b1 to b10. In the following description, the probability that a ball will flow down is equal on routes c1 and c2 (1/2), and the probabilities of branching left and right on branches b1 to b10 are equal on both sides (1/2). Will be explained. It is assumed that the sphere will not flow down from the upper right.

  The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z0 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 to reach the route c11. It is considered that the branch b5 is reached from the route c1 via the branch b1 and is reached from the route c2. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z0 when it reaches the route c11 is 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2), which is the probability of the ball flowing down from the route c1. It is 3/8 because it is represented by the sum of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the route c2 and 1/4 (= 1/2 × 1/2) (“^” means exponentiation). That is, the respective probabilities are the product of 1/2 the probability that the sphere will flow down the routes c1 and c2, and the number that is raised to the power of 1/2 by the number of branches b1 to b10 through which the sphere will pass before reaching the landing area z0. It is represented by.

  The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z1 will be described. To reach the landing area z1, the branch b3 flows down the left side to reach the route c15, the branch b4 flows down the left side to reach the route c16, or the branch b6 flows down the right side to reach the route c14. It is necessary to reach the route c13 or to flow down the right side at the branch b7 to reach the route c13.

  Up to the branch b3, only when the sphere flows down from the route c1 is considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the route c15, the probability that the sphere will reach the route c15 is 1/16 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3). Further, up to the branch b4, only when the sphere flows down from the route c1 is considered, and since there are four branches before the sphere reaches the route c16, the probability that the sphere reaches the route c16 is 1/32. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 4). Further, up to the branch b6, only when the sphere flows down from the route c1 is considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the route c14, the probability that the sphere will reach the route c14 is 1/16. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3).

  Up to the branch b7, both cases where spheres flow down from the path c1 and the path c2 are conceivable, and there are four branches before the sphere that flows down from the path c1 reaches the path c13, and three branches. May exist. There are two branches before the sphere flowing down from the route c2 reaches the route c13. Therefore, the probability of the sphere reaching the route c13 is 3/32 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 4 + 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 3), which is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the route c1. It is 7/32 because it is represented by the sum of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the route c2 and 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2).

  Here, the probability that the ball will reach the landing area z1 is 12/32 because it is the sum of the probabilities that the ball will reach the routes c13 to c16 described above.

  The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z2 can be represented by the probability that the sphere will reach the route c12, which is equal to the probability that the sphere that has reached the branch b7 will reach the route c13. Therefore, the probability that the ball will reach the landing area z2 is 7/32.

  The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the route c17 or down the left side at the branch b10 to reach the route c18.

  Up to the branch b9, only when the sphere flows down from the route c1 is considered, and there are six branches before the sphere reaches the route c17. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the route c17 is 1/128 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 6). Further, up to the branch b10, only when the sphere flows down from the route c1 is considered, and since there are seven branches before the sphere reaches the route c18, the probability that the sphere reaches the route c18 is 1/256. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z3 is 3/256 because it is the sum of the probability that the ball will reach the routes c17 and c18 described above.

  The probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 to reach the route c19. It should be noted that all the balls flowing down the right side of the branch b10 flow down along the path c19. The probability that the sphere will reach the route c19 is equal to the probability that the sphere that has reached the branch b10 will reach the route c18. Therefore, the probability that the sphere will reach the landing area z4 is 1/256 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  From these, the ratio of the sphere reaching each landing area z0 to z4 is (z0: z1: z2: z3: z4) = (96: 96: 56: 3: 1). This ratio has a correlation with the buffer ribs 322 and 332.

  For example, comparing the landing area z1 and the landing area z3, although the heights of the balls falling on the landing areas z1 and z3 are the same, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is larger in the landing area z3. It is smaller than z1. This is because the ratio of the balls reaching the landing area z3 is 1/32 of the ratio of the balls reaching the landing area z1. That is, even if the bounding of the falling ball is not suppressed to the extent of the landing area z1, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing area z3, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by making the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 smaller than that in the landing area z1.

  For example, comparing the landing area z2 and the landing area z4, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is larger than the distance of the ball falling on the landing area z2, though the distance of the ball falling on the landing area z4 is longer. The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the ratio of the balls reaching the landing area z4 is 1/56 of the ratio of the balls reaching the landing area z2. That is, even if the bounding of the falling ball is not suppressed to the extent of the landing area z2, there is little risk that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing area z4, the disposition position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by making the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 smaller than that in the landing area z2.

  In addition, in the above description, the probability that the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 branch is equal to the left and right (1/2), but by changing the width of the nail, the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 are divided. It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by reducing the distance between the nails in the flow path that the arrow on the left side of the branch b1 passes to as small as the diameter of the sphere, the probability that the sphere will flow down along the arrow on the right side of the branch b1 is greater than 1/2. can do. In the other branches b2 to b10, the probability of sphere branching can be adjusted in the same manner.

  As a result, the frequency with which the balls reach the paths c11 to c19 can be adjusted, and the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

  Further, the buffer rib 322 is formed such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward as it goes rearward (see FIG. 15B). Thereby, the flow of the ball to the first out port 314 can be accelerated.

  It returns to FIG. 14 and demonstrates. The lower left plate member 320 includes a long plate-shaped main body portion 321, a buffer rib 322 in which thin plates that are continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321 extend in the front-rear direction, and the buffer ribs. A front connecting plate 323 formed in a manner of connecting the front surfaces of the main body 322, a step portion 324 formed to bulge upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front, and extending from the step portion 324 to the left when viewed from the front. The ball flow rail portion 325 and a shaft support hole 326 formed in the front-rear direction at the right end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front are mainly provided.

  The cushioning rib 322 is a portion through which a sphere heading for the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses a rebound of the sphere falling in the up-down direction in the up-down direction. That is, since the buffer ribs 322 are formed of thin plates that are continuously provided in the left-right direction, when the ball is collided with a falling ball, it can be deflected in the thickness direction to reduce the impact of the collision. Further, when the ball moves in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the buffer rib 322, the ball is caught between the buffer ribs 322, so that the ball is braked. Further, the buffer rib 322 has a forming height and an aspect ratio that increase toward the right side in the front view (game board 13 (see FIG. 2)) inward in the width direction.

  The front connecting plate 323 improves the strength of the buffer rib 322 by connecting the buffer rib 322.

  The step portion 324 is a raised portion for dropping the sphere that has flowed down from the sphere flow rail portion 325 in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load in the left-right direction from being applied to the buffer rib 322 from the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 325. As a result, the buffer rib 322 can be prevented from being bent in the left-right direction by receiving the load in the left-right direction.

  That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed of a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, it may be broken by a load in the left-right direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a ball rolling on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325, which has a speed in the left-right direction and may load a load in the left-right direction, moves up and down from the step 324 to the buffer rib 322. It is formed so as to drop in the direction. As a result, the position where the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be brought closer to the right in the width direction as the speed of the ball in the left-right direction is higher.

  Therefore, when the ball lands on the cushioning rib 322, the load applied to the cushioning rib 322 in the left-right direction can be made smaller toward the left (outer side) in the width direction. Therefore, as the cushion rib 322 is moved to the left in the width direction, the possibility that the ball is bent due to the load in the left-right direction is reduced, and the aspect ratio of the cushion rib 322 can be formed smaller than that in the right direction of the width. .. In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer rib 322 is arranged as compared with the case where the buffer rib 322 has the same length in the width direction. The position can be lowered.

  Here, with the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 kept constant at the left and right positions in the width direction (with the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 being formed in the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface formed in the above. However, in this case, the disposition position of the step portion 324 becomes high, and the disposition position of the ball flow rail portion 325 formed so as to be inclined downward toward the step portion 324 also becomes high. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) becomes large, and the game area is suppressed.

  On the other hand, the larger the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, the greater the effect of reducing the momentum of the ball (deceleration effect). Therefore, the buffer ribs 322 are formed in such a manner that the aspect ratio increases from the vicinity of the step portion 324 toward the center of the game area.

  The upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the curve of the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 up to the front of the step 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step 324 (in the middle of the horizontal direction of the buffer rib 322). The maximum height is formed). However, in this case, the ball reaching the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling to the left. Therefore, the balls are likely to stay in the landing area z1, and it becomes difficult to smoothly discharge the balls.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 in the width direction of the buffer rib 322 is small, the sphere reaching the landing area z1 easily rolls to the left (the landing area z2 side). Move. Therefore, the balls can be made to flow to the landing area z2 before the balls stay in the landing area z1, so that the balls can be discharged smoothly.

  In addition, the step portion 324 has a function of stopping the ball flowing down above the buffer rib 322 and flowing to the left. This can prevent the ball from bouncing beyond the lateral width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front lid member 340 (see FIG. 13).

  The shaft support hole 326 is a portion where the insertion shaft 343 of the front lid member 340 is inserted and is axially supported.

  The lower right plate member 330 includes a main body 331 having an elongated plate shape, a buffer rib 332 in which thin wall portions continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body 331 extend in the front-rear direction, respectively. A front connecting plate 333 formed in a manner of connecting the front surfaces of the cushioning ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 formed to be recessed downward at the front end right end of the main body 331, and a rightward front view from the recessed portion 324. Mainly includes a ball flow rail portion 335 extending to the front and a shaft supporting hole 336 formed in the front-rear direction at the left end portion of the main body portion 331 in front view.

  The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body 331 is the main body 321, the buffer rib 332 is the buffer rib 322, the front connecting plate 333 is the front connecting plate 323, the ball flow rail 335 is the ball flow rail 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is the shaft. Since the technical idea is the same as that of the support hole 326, the description of the common part will be omitted.

  The buffer rib 332 is formed such that the left and right forming widths thereof are shorter than the buffer rib 322. As a result, the left and right forming widths of the second out port 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward as compared with the first out port 314. It is possible to secure a space for disposing the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 (the disposition position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered).

  Here, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 because the flow path of the ball to the second out port 315 is regulated. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, by arranging the first variable winning a prize device 65 at the upper right of the second outlet 315 when viewed from the front, the ball flows into the first specific winning a prize port 65a when the opening / closing plate is opened, When the opening / closing plate is closed, the ball is dropped vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing into the second outlet 315 from the upper right of the front view. In other words, a non-downflow region in which the downflow of the ball is restricted is formed in the upper right portion of the second out port 315.

  Therefore, the downward flow direction of the sphere to the lower right plate member 330 is limited only to the vertical drop and the downward flow from the width direction (from the spherical flow rail portion 335) (the downward flow from the diagonally upper right is restricted). .. Therefore, since there is no inflow of the ball from diagonally upper right, the direction in which the ball bounces can be limited, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be narrowed, and the formation width of the second out port 315 can be narrowed. As a result, a space for disposing the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

  The recessed portion 334 is a recess for bouncing the sphere flowing down the sphere flow rail portion 335. Therefore, the formation width of the recessed portion 334 is set to a width on which the sphere can be placed without coming into contact with the adjacent cushioning rib 332.

  The sphere that has flowed down the sphere flow rail portion 335 is dropped into the recessed portion 334, abuts on the upper surface of the recessed portion 334, bounces, and then drops onto the buffer rib 332. As a result, it is possible to prevent the buffer rib 332 from being loaded with a load in the width direction and prevent the buffer rib 332 from being broken.

  The recessed portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 is inserted. This makes it easier to use a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing the fastening screw into the fastening hole B to fasten and fix the board lower unit 300 to the game board 13. That is, the recessed portion 334 has both the effect of preventing the buffer rib 332 from being broken and the effect of facilitating the fastening and fixing of the base member 310.

  The front lid member 340 has a plate-shaped main body 341 in which the first winning opening 64 is formed in the uppermost portion, and an opening 342 formed in the center of the main body 341 to allow the rotation effect member 313a to be visually recognized. A pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336 are mainly provided.

  The main body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the side wall portion limits the downward flow direction of the sphere. That is, a ball that collides with the body 341 from the right side cannot penetrate to the left, while a ball that collides with the body 341 from the left cannot penetrate to the right.

  The insertion shaft 343 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336. Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is formed to be slightly smaller than that of the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

  Next, the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. 16 and 17, the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is shown in the retracted position.

  18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical movement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that includes a vertical groove portion 414 that is recessed on the right side when viewed from the rear side from the rear surface side to the front surface side and that recess is extended in the vertical direction. A rotary crank member 420 rotated around the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, a drive device 430 for generating a driving force of the rotary crank member 420, and a driving force transmitted from the rotary crank member 420 to the base member 410. The arm member 440 that is swung about the shaft portion 412 of the base member 410 is disposed on the opposite side of the vertical groove portion 414 of the base member 410 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440. The slide member 450 and a slide hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440 are suspended in the vertical direction in association with the swing of the arm member 440. A lens member 460 is slidably formed mainly includes a pair of door member 470 which is respectively pivotally supported on the lens member 460, a.

  The base member 410 includes a main body 411 formed in the shape of a long plate on the left and right, and a cylindrical support hole 442 of the arm member 440 that is provided in a cylindrical shape from the right end of the main body 411 toward the front side. A shaft portion 412 that is supported, a connecting hole 413 that is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction, and that connects the rotary crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and is formed from the rear surface side to the front surface side of the main body portion 411 on the right side in rear view. It mainly includes an upper and lower groove portion 414 in which the recessed portion extends in the vertical direction, and a recessed portion 415 that is recessed from the front surface to the rear surface side on both the left and right outer sides of the vertical groove portion 414.

  The upper and lower groove portions 414 are portions where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 of the combined operation unit 500 is accommodated on the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, in the combined operation unit 500, the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is suppressed as the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves toward the contracted state, so that the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is rocked to cause the vertical groove portion 414 to move. Collisions against the left and right inner surfaces are prevented. The recessed portion 415 is a portion to which the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

  The rotary crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 421, and a sliding protrusion portion 422 that is provided in a cylindrical shape on the front side from one end portion of the main body portion 421 and is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440. An engaging portion 423 that is engaged with the fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 and that disables relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 is mainly provided.

  When the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotated, the driving force of the drive device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440, and the arm member 440 is swung about the shaft portion 412. ..

  The drive device 430 includes a drive motor 431 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a drive gear 431 a that is rotationally driven by the drive motor 431, a transmission gear 432 that meshes with the drive gear 431 a, and a transmission gear 432. Mainly includes a fitting portion 432a which is formed on the front side with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting hole 413 and whose inner side surface is fitted to the engaging portion 423 of the rotary crank member 420.

  The fitting portion 432a is a portion having a recess having a cross-sectional shape in which a circular shape is arranged at each vertex of a triangle, is inserted into the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, and the rotary crank member 420 is provided on the tip side thereof. The engaging portion 423 of is fitted such that it cannot rotate relative to the other. As a result, the main body 411 of the base member 410 is formed in such a manner that the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 sandwich the plate, and as described above, the relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 is disabled. The transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 rotate in synchronization with each other. That is, the driving force of the drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotary crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432.

  The arm member 440 includes a main body 441 formed in the shape of a long rod, a shaft support hole 442 formed in the base end side (right side in front view) and pivotally supported by the shaft portion 412, and a base end side. The sliding hole 443, which is formed as a long hole on the swinging end side which is the end on the opposite side of the above, into which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the sliding protrusion 422 of the rotary crank member 420 are inserted. And a bottomed hole-shaped insertion portion 444 that is formed.

  The shape of the insertion portion 444 is set so that the rotary crank member 420 can make one rotation while the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444. Therefore, the arm member 440 can perform the swinging motion regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 420.

  The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 451, a slide guide portion 452 extending rearward from both left and right end portions of the main body portion 451, and guided in a recessed portion 415 so as to be vertically slidable. A central guide recessed portion 453, which is a recess formed in the front in the widthwise central portion of the lens 451 and extending in the vertical direction, and through which the sliding protrusion portion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and both left and right ends of the main body portion 451. Mainly provided with a both-end guide recessed portion 454 which is a recess formed in the front surface of the portion and extending in the up-down direction and which guides the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460.

  The lens member 460 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 461 having a circular opening formed in the center, a magnifying lens 462 formed with a magnifying lens process fitted into the opening of the main body portion 461, and a widthwise center of the main body portion 461. Sliding projections 463 projecting to the rear side at the upper end and inserted in the sliding holes 443 of the arm member 440 so as to be vertically slidable, and sliding projections 463 projecting to the rear side at both widthwise ends of the main body 461. A stable slide portion 464 that is vertically slidably inserted into both end guide recessed portions 454 of the member 450, and a lower shaft portion 473 and an upper portion of the door member 470 that are axially rotatably disposed to the lower left of the main body portion 461 in a front view. Mainly provided are a pair of rotary cylinders 465 through which the shaft portions 474 are inserted, and a drive motor 466 for rotating the pair of rotary cylinders 465 in mutually opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown). That.

  The movement operation of the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. Note that FIG. 20 illustrates a closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

  When the arm member 440 is swung from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the extended position (see FIG. 20), the lens member 460 that is pivotally supported by the sliding hole 443 on the swing end side of the arm member 440 slides. The moving protrusion 463 (see FIG. 18) is slid in the central guide recess 453 of the slide member 450. The lens member 460 is vertically guided by the both end guide concave portions 454 of the slide member 450, and the slide member 450 is vertically guided by the concave portion 415 of the base member 410. The member 460 is slid in the vertical direction.

  It returns to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 and demonstrates. The door member 470 is configured by dividing a circular plate into upper and lower parts, a lower main body 471 formed on the lower side, an upper main body 472 formed on the upper side of the lower main body 471, and a lower side. A lower shaft portion 473 projecting cylindrically on the back side at the lower end portion of the main body portion 471 and inserted into the rotation cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as to be relatively non-rotatable, and a lower side circular portion on the back surface side at the lower end portion of the upper body portion 472. An upper shaft portion 474, which is provided in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotation cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as to be relatively non-rotatable, is mainly provided.

  The lower main body 471 includes a guide protrusion 471 a that is provided on a side surface of the side that contacts the upper main body 472, and the upper main body 472 has a side surface that contacts the lower main body 471. And a receiving recessed portion 472a recessed in. By fitting the guide protrusion 471a and the receiving recessed portion 472a, relative positioning between the lower body 471 and the upper body 472 in the closed state can be performed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the guide protrusion 471a is provided so as to project in a tapered shape, the guide protrusion 471a can be reliably fitted into the receiving recess 472a.

  The operation of the door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. It should be noted that FIG. 21 illustrates an open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

  The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by the rotation of the rotary cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. Since the pair of rotary cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), the door member 470 is changed from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). In this case, the lower body 471 and the upper body 472 can be swung outward (opposite directions). Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower body portion 471 and the upper body portion 472 can be swung inward with respect to each other.

  As a result, the time for rocking the lower body 471 and the upper body 472 can be halved compared to the case where the front side of the lens member 460 is covered by rocking a single cover member.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 45. The combined operation unit 500 arranges the expansion / contraction effect device 540 on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the extended position (see FIG. 9). It is a unit. Further, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is formed to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510.

  22 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the combined operation unit 500. 22 and 23 show the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position which is the end position formed outside the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  FIG. 24 is a front exploded perspective view of the combined movement unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of the combined movement unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the composite operation unit 500 is a unit that performs an effect by sliding and swinging the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and includes a base member 510 forming a skeleton and the base member 510. A rotary plate 520 rotatably formed around the first shaft portion 512, a first driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 to generate a driving force of the rotary plate 520, and fastened to the front surface of the rotary plate 520. An expansion / contraction production device 540 that is fixed and is formed to be expandable / contractible in the radial direction of the rotary plate 520, and one end portion is connected to the expansion / contraction production device 540 and the other end portion on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510. In addition, the rotating arm member 550 that forms the expanding and contracting motion of the expanding and contracting device 540 by the swinging motion, and the driving force of the rotating arm member 550 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510. The second drive device 560 to be generated, the rotary crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the second drive device 560 to the rotary arm member 550, the rotary arm member 550 that is fastened and fixed from the front of the base member 510, and the rotary arm member 550. A front cover 580 mainly for blinding the crankshaft 570 and other mechanical parts on the rotating shaft side is provided.

  The base member 510 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 511, a cylindrical first shaft portion 512 projecting forward from a substantially lower center in the width direction of the main body portion 511, and the first shaft portion 512. Three rows of arc-shaped holes 513 drilled along the center arc, and first through holes 514 drilled adjacent to the second arc-shaped holes 513b of the three rows of arc-shaped holes 513. And a columnar second shaft portion 515 protruding forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511, and adjacent to the second shaft portion 515. The second through hole 516 to be bored, the cylindrical third shaft portion 517 protruding forward from the lower right end of the main body portion 511 in a front view, and the frontward bent portion formed from the edge of the main body portion 511. The bent wall portion 518 is mainly provided.

  The first shaft portion 512 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520 and serves as a rotating shaft of the rotating plate 520. Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotary plate 520.

  The arcuate hole 513 includes a first arcuate hole 513a, a second arcuate hole 513b, and a third arcuate hole 513c from the side close to the first shaft portion 512.

  The first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are long holes into which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotary plate 520 is inserted and which guide the rotation of the rotary plate 520. As a result, the load applied to the first shaft portion 512 when the rotating plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. 24 and 25 show a state in which the collar is fastened to the distal end of the insertion shaft 525, the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c connect the collar and the main body 521. Placed between them (inserted before fastening the collar).

  The second arc-shaped hole 513b is a long hole in which the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 is arranged and moved. The upper side of the substantially central portion is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 is arranged in the opened portion. Accordingly, the meshing portion of the drive motor 531 of the first driving device 530 and the arcuate rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 can be arranged in the plate thickness portion of the main body portion 511, and thus the thickness of the composite operation unit 500 can be increased. The size in the depth direction (size in the front-back direction in FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

  The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes into which the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 and the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 are inserted, respectively.

  The second shaft portion 515 is a columnar portion to which the lid portion 575 of the rotating crank member 570 is fastened and fixed on the front side and serves as a central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571. Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 of the rotating crank member 570.

  The third shaft portion 517 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 and serves as a central axis of rotation of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550. Around the third shaft portion 517, a torsion spring 517a that generates a biasing force that moves the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position is wound.

  The torsion spring 517a is formed in such a manner that arms are respectively extended from both ends of a coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517. One arm is fixed to the lower right portion of the folding wall 518 in the front view (near the first stopper 518a), and the other arm opposite to the one arm is engaged with the rotary arm member 550. It is locked to the stopper 555.

  The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed on the right side of the first shaft portion 512, and a left side portion of the first shaft portion 512. And a third stopper portion 518c formed in.

  The first stopper portion 518a is a portion that restricts rotation of the rotation arm member 550. That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the extended position (see FIG. 9), it is brought into contact with the first stopper portion 518a and the lowering is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is arranged below the third stopper portion 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotary plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotary plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the rotation direction toward the second stopper portion 512b. You can That is, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 described later is formed such that the maximum angle of the clockwise swing in the front view is larger than the maximum angle of the counterclockwise swing in the front view.

  The rotating plate 520 includes a fan-shaped plate-shaped main body portion 521, a shaft support hole 522 formed in a circular shape in a thickness direction at a root portion of the main body portion 521, and a body having a width slightly larger than an inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 linearly recessed on the front surface of the portion 521, a pair of expansion and contraction stoppers 524 formed on both sides of the lower end portion of the rail receiving groove 523, and protruding from the rear surface of the main body portion 521. A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) insertion shafts 525, and an arcuate rack projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 521 in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 522 and having gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral portion. 526 is mainly provided.

  The first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is inserted into the shaft support hole 522. Therefore, the rotary plate 520 is swung around the first shaft portion 512.

  The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion to which the slide rail 545 of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 is fastened and fixed, and the expansion / contraction producing device 540 expands / contracts along the extending direction of the rail receiving groove 523. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 changes depending on the posture of the rotating plate 520.

  The expansion / contraction stopper 524 is a portion that abuts on the inner side surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 in the vertical direction and restricts the movement width of the slide plate 544. By being formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523 and contacting the inner side surfaces of the slide plate 544 on both sides thereof, it is possible to prevent the slide rail 545 from receiving a load in the direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction and improve the durability. Can be planned.

  The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted into the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c of the base member 510 and guides the rotation of the rotating plate 520, and has a diameter of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third circle. It is formed to be slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arcuate hole 513c. In addition, a collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c is fastened and fixed to the tip, so that the rotary plate 520 is irremovably connected to the base member 510.

  The arcuate rack 526 is inserted into the second arcuate hole 513b of the base member 510 and meshes with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530. Since the meshing portion between the arcuate rack 526 and the first drive device 530 is formed in a region including the thickness portion of the base member 510, the dimension of the combined operation unit 500 in the thickness direction can be suppressed.

  The first drive device 530 mainly includes a drive motor 531 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510, and a drive gear 532 that is inserted into the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and that is axially rotated by the drive motor 531.

  Next, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the stretch effect device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the stretch effect device 540.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 includes a main body member 541 that forms a skeleton and a main body of the rotating arm member 550 between the main body member 541 and a pair of the main body member 541. The first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted, and the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are axially slidable along the extending direction of the insertion holes 542d and 543d. A slide plate 544 that is connected to the slide plate 544 and a slide plate 545 that connects the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520 and one end of which is fitted into the rail receiving groove 523 and fastened and fixed, and is raised to the front side of the main body member 541. The front plate member 546, which is fastened and fixed, the connecting slide member 547 slidably supported by the shaft supporting portion 546c of the front plate member 546, and the connecting slide member 547. Mainly includes a decorative member 548 front drooping portion 548b is formed to be movable in the front of the body member 541 is fixed.

  The main body member 541 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 541a forming a skeleton, a cylindrical projection portion 541b protruding toward the rear surface side in the widthwise central portion of the main body portion 541a, and a rear surface of the projection portion 541b. A pair of upper and lower fastening parts 541c projecting upward and downward on the left side of the body, a second pair of fastening parts 541d protruding vertically on the right side of the projecting part 541b in the rear view, and an upper left portion of the body part 541a in the rear view. It mainly includes a guide fastening portion 541e that is provided in a protruding manner, and a fastening hole 541f that is formed in a plurality (three places in the present embodiment) on the front side of the main body portion 541a and that fastens and fixes the front plate member 546.

  The protruding portion 541b is a portion that is inserted into the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the protrusion 541b is formed to be slightly smaller than the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the arc-shaped hole 554. Further, since the protrusion 541b is inserted into the arcuate hole 554, when the rotating arm member 550 is swung, the main body member 541 can be interlocked.

  The first raised fastening portion 541c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. The reason why the second lift-up fastening portion 541d is longer in the vertical direction than the first lift-up fastening portion 541c is that the second lift-up fastening portion 541d is disposed at a position where it does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550. Here, in the present embodiment, the rotating arm member does not pass through the lower left part of the main body member 541 in the front view in the rotating locus (see FIGS. 37, 40 and 44). Therefore, it is possible to widen the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541d compared to the first raised fastening portions 541c, and it is possible to improve the rigidity of the second raised fastening portions 541d.

  The guide fastening portion 541e is a portion to which the auxiliary fastening portion 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and is a portion to which the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided when the expansion / contraction producing device 540 is in the expanded state. That is, even if the protrusion 541b is not guided by the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guide fastening portion 541e guides the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect member 540 are operated in association with each other.

  The fastening hole 541f is a through hole to which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

  The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a that is fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a rear surface restricting portion that extends upward from a position on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a that is one step higher on the rear surface side. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c protruding from the left and right sides of the rear surface restricting portion 542b to the rear surface in a wall shape, and a vertical projection penetrating the upper end portion of the rear surface restricting portion 542b to the rear surface. Mainly includes an insertion hole 542d and an auxiliary fastening portion 542e that extends from the back surface regulation portion 542b and is fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541e.

  The rear surface restricting portion 542b is a portion provided on the rear surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the rear surface and the protruding portion 541b from falling out from the arcuate hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the telescopic effect device 540 expands and contracts, and suppresses the deviation of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542.

  The insertion hole 542d is a hole into which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is slidably movable with respect to the first guide member 542.

  The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raised fastening portion 541d, and a rear surface restricting portion that extends upward from a position on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a that is one step higher on the rear surface side. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c protruding from the left and right sides of the rear surface restricting portion 543b to the rear surface in a wall shape, and an upper end portion of the rear surface restricting portion 543b which is formed so as to vertically penetrate therethrough. And an insertion hole 543d for insertion.

  The back surface restricting portion 543b is a portion provided on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and prevents the protruding portion 541b from coming off from the arcuate hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the telescopic effect device 540 expands and contracts, and suppresses the deviation of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543.

  The insertion hole 543d is a hole into which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable with respect to the first guide member 543.

  The slide plate 544 includes a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed portion 544b in which a wide recess extending vertically is formed on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and the recessed portion 544b. Both-end recessed portions 544c in which recesses extending in the up-and-down direction are formed on the front surfaces on the left and right sides, and a rail receiver protruding in a semicircular shape toward the front side at upper and lower end portions of the recessed portions 544c at both ends. A portion 544d, a cylindrical slide rod 544e extending vertically inwardly of the recessed portions 544c at both ends, and a production assistance wall 544f projecting toward the front in the substantially vertical center of the main body 544a, The upper and lower ends of the recessed portion 544b mainly include stopper portions 544g that are provided at both left and right ends so as to project toward the rear surface.

  The recessed portion 544b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520. Therefore, the width of the inner side surface of the recessed portion 544b is formed to be slightly larger than the width dimension of the expansion / contraction stopper 524.

  The both-end recessed portions 544c are portions for accommodating projections in which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. As a result, it is possible to guide the protrusions of the guide members 542 and 543, which are provided with the insertion holes 542d and 543d, from the outside.

  The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion housed in the guide rail portions 542c and 543c of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, wobbling of the guide members 542 and 543 with respect to the slide plate 544 can be suppressed.

  The slide rod 544e is a columnar rod that is inserted into the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 are formed so as to be slidable in the extending direction of the slide rod 544e (vertical direction in FIG. 26).

  The production assistance portion 544f is a portion that is brought into contact with the rear hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 and moves the decorative member 548 when the expansion / contraction producing device 540 is in the extended state. As a result, the appearance of the stretch effect producing device 540 can be changed.

  The stopper portion 544g is a portion that is in contact with the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 and defines the vertical movement end of the slide plate 544.

  The slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotary plate 520, and the other end opposite to the one end is fastened and fixed to the recessed portion 544b of the slide plate 544.

  The front plate member 546 is an effect part that can be visually recognized by the player, and is a plate-shaped main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 in a front view, and from the main body portion 546a toward the back side. It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b that is provided so as to project in accordance with the position where the fastening hole 541f is formed, and a pair of shaft support portions 546c that are provided so as to project from the upper end of the main body portion 546a toward the rear side.

  The fastening portion 546b is a portion that fixes the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and the fastening portion 546b is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

  The shaft supporting portion 546c is a portion that slidably supports the connecting sliding member 547. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support portion 546c is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b of the coupling sliding member 547.

  The connecting sliding member 547 is formed in a plate-like main body portion 547a, a pair of sliding elongated holes 547b formed in a vertically extending elongated hole and formed in the front-rear direction, and formed in the up-down direction. A pair of insertion holes 547c are mainly provided.

  The sliding long hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft supporting portion 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is formed to be slightly larger than that of the shaft supporting portion 546c. A collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is fastened and fixed to the tip end portion of the shaft supporting portion 546c, so that the connecting sliding member 547 is axially supported by the front plate member 546 without being pulled out. It The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

  The decoration member 548 includes a main body portion 548a formed in a plate shape and the connection sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front hanging portion 548b formed by hanging downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a. And a rear drooping portion 548c that is formed to hang downward on the rear side of the.

  When the connecting slide member 547 moves with respect to the front plate member 546, the front hanging portion 548b is covered with the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and is viewed separately from the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43). 37)) can be formed. As a result, the appearance of the stretch effect member 540 can be changed, and the effect effect can be improved.

  The rear drooping portion 548c is a portion that is brought into contact with the production auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 by the expansion / contraction operation of the telescopic production device 540. Are moved with respect to the front plate member 546.

  24 and 25, the description will be continued. The rotating arm member 550 has a body 551 formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 formed in one end of the body 551 in the front-rear direction, and a shaft support hole 552 close to the shaft support hole 552. And a deformed elongated hole 553 which is a specially shaped bottomed elongated hole formed on the back side of the main body 551 and a front side of the other end which is the opposite end of one end. The arcuate hole 554, which is an arcuate bottomed long hole, and the rear end side of the main body 551 protruding near the shaft support hole 552, the tip is bent like a hook, and the other arm of the torsion spring 517a is locked. And a locking portion 555 that is provided.

  The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole into which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517, so that the rotating arm member 550 is formed to be rotatable around the third shaft portion 517.

  The deformed elongated hole 553 is a portion into which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 will be described later.

  The arcuate hole 554 is a long hole into which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arcuate hole 554 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding portion 541b. Further, the arc formed by the arc-shaped hole 554 matches the arc formed by the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is swung about the first shaft portion 512 in the expanded state (FIGS. 37 to 39). Up to).

  Further, the arcuate hole 554 is provided with a tip portion 554a which is opened at the tip of the other end of the rotary arm member 550 and whose width widens at the tip.

  The second driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force that rotates the rotating crank member 570, and is inserted into the driving motor 561 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510. A drive gear 562 that is axially rotated by a drive motor 561 is mainly provided.

  The drive gear 562 is meshed with the transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotary crank member 570. As a result, when the drive gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

  The rotating crank member 570 is a member that transmits a driving force to the rotating arm member 550, and has a ring-shaped main body 571 pivotally supported by the second shaft 515 and an outer peripheral surface of the main body 571. The transmission gear teeth 572 to be provided, the restricting umbrella portion 573 formed so as to cover the transmission gear teeth 572 on the front side, and the center of the main body 571 are eccentric to each other and are slidably protruded to the front side. It mainly includes a protrusion 574 and a lid portion 575 formed with a diameter larger than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 and fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft portion 515.

  The transmission gear teeth 572 mesh with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 561 is transmitted to the rotary crank member 570.

  The restricting umbrella portion 573 prevents the drive gear 532 from being displaced from the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572. Thereby, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear teeth 572 can be optimized.

  The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion that is inserted into the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550. That is, whether the transmission of the driving force is formed or not is determined by the relationship between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550.

  The lid portion 575 is a portion for disposing the main body portion 571 in the base member 510 in a non-pullable manner.

  The relationship between the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. First, the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) and 29 (a).

  28A and 29A are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. Note that FIG. 28A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the extended position. 28 (a) and 29 (a), the deformed elongated hole 553 and the sliding protrusion 574 are shown by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 are shown by imaginary lines. To be done.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, when the rotating arm member 550 is in the retracted position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and the rotating crank member 570. A straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal to each other, and an upward orthogonal state is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, in a state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the projecting position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and the rotating crank member 570. It is possible to form a downward orthogonal state in which a straight line connecting the rotation axis of and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal to. Note that FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle from the downward orthogonal state described above.

  The deformed elongated hole 553 includes a transmission groove portion 553a through which the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 by the movement of the sliding protrusion portion 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c connected from the lower end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a, and a selection wall portion 553d mainly connecting the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Prepare

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the transmission groove portion 553a is a recessed groove that extends linearly to the left from the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove portion 553a is formed with a length that allows the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 to move from the upward orthogonal state to the downward orthogonal state, and the formation width of the inner peripheral surface thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. Largely formed. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted from the rotation crank member 570 to the rotation arm member 550 while the sliding protrusion 574 moves in the transmission groove 553a.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in the upward orthogonal state. The wall portion is formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574. That is, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the upward orthogonal state, the rotary crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotary arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotary crank member 570 is the rotary arm. Not transmitted to member 550.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed in the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b moves. The direction is oriented to the axis of rotation of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed so as to face the first non-transmission wall 553b, the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550 is the rotation of the rotating crank member 570. Oriented to the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall 553b, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is rotated by the rotation crank from the lower side wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged in the projecting position. It is a wall formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding protrusion 574 with the rotation axis of the member 570 as the center. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the downward orthogonal state (the state where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view in a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 29A), The rotating crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotating crank member 570 is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 29A, the moving direction of the second non-transmission wall portion 553b is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. Be done. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged so as to face the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 29B), the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550. Are directed to the axis of rotation of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed to face the second non-transmission wall 553c, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating.

  The selection wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed by a smooth curved surface connecting the right end portion of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b in front view and the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c in front view, and It is formed above the curve obtained by extending the transmission wall portion 553b.

  The selection wall portion 553d is arranged so as to face the right side portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed such that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c increases as it goes toward the left end portion of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), the sliding protrusion 574 crosses the first non-transmission wall 553b and the second non-transmission wall 553b. In the margin portion D (see FIG. 32B) before reaching the wall portion 553c, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation is not restricted. That is, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is not restricted by the sliding protrusion 574.

  The right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along an arc S1 centering on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is The second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed so as to intersect with the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the angle formed by the arc S1 and the right end portion.

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 that is necessary to accommodate the change amount changes. That is, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount while the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 is The sliding amount is smaller than the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c are in contact with each other by a predetermined amount. Therefore, depending on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall 553c or the selection wall 553d, the swing arm member 550 swings with respect to the speed of the rotary crank member 570. The speed can be changed.

  It returns to FIG. 28 to FIG. 31 and demonstrates. 28 to 31 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 showing the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in time series. Note that in FIG. 28A, the upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position), and in FIGS. 28 to 31, the rotating crank member 570 is counterclockwise in a front view. The rotated state is illustrated in order, the odd-shaped elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotary crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines. ..

  28 to 31, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 detects a posture in which it expands and contracts in the vertical direction by a position detection sensor (not shown), and the swing is stopped in that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, the swing of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is prevented by the resistance between the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25) and the drive gear 532.

  In the state of FIG. 28A, the rotary crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position vertically downward from the protrusion 541b by a distance h1. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state, the protruding portion 541b is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by the distance h1.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 28A (rotated counterclockwise by the angle T1 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A)), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by a distance h2 (h2 <h1) (see FIG. 28 (b). ) See) to reach. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and abut against each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), the angle T2 is counterclockwise (T2≈180 degrees> T1). ) Is rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553 (transmission region), enters the region facing the second non-transmission wall 553c, and the protrusion 541 becomes the reference. The state (see FIG. 29 (a)) is reached in a position spaced vertically above the horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3 <h2). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (c), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (rotated counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)) by an angle T3 (T3> T2). Then, the sliding protrusion 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 29B is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the sliding protrusion 574 moves toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 in the second direction. It is pushed by the non-transmission wall portion 553c. In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, so that the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in a front view from the states of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b).

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 29A, stopping the rotating crank member 570 can be considered. However, if the effect speed of the rotating arm member 550 is set to a high speed until just before reaching the extended position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second drive device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 decreases. If it is made gentle, the effect cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating crank member 570 is not stopped in the state of FIG. 29A but is rotated to the state of FIG. The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state of FIG. 29 (a) (the protrusion 541 can be stopped at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3). As a result, the speed of the rotary crank member 570 is maintained until the rotary arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotary crank member 570 is rotated from the state of FIG. 29 (a) to the state of FIG. 29 (b). The 570 can be slowed down. Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, it is possible to improve both the effect of the rotating arm member 550 and the durability of the second drive device 560.

  From the state of FIG. 29 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), the angle T4 is counterclockwise (T4≈270 degrees> T3). 30), the sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state of FIG. 30A is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  That is, while the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by a quarter turn from the state shown in FIG. 29A, the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture, and the protruding portion 541b is in the same position. Maintained. It should be noted that the length in which the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protruding portion 541b is maintained in the same position is the length during which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated ¼ round in the present embodiment. It need not be limited to that. The length by which the front plate member 546 is continuously arranged at the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than in the present embodiment, the length in which the front plate member 546 is continuously arranged at the lower position can be made longer than in the present embodiment.

  The rotation crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 30A (rotated counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A) by an angle T5 (T5> T4)). Then, the sliding protrusion 574 pushes up the selection wall portion 553d of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by a distance h2 (h2> h3). (See FIG. 30B). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and abut against each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). ).

  That is, when the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the selection wall portion 553d and the sliding protrusion 574 are brought into contact with each other, so that the rotating arm member is rotated. The driving force is transmitted to 550 (transmission area).

  From the state of FIG. 30 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (rotated counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)) by an angle T6 (T6> T5). Then, the sliding protrusion 574 enters the area of the odd-shaped elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, and the protrusion 541 extends vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h2). The state (see FIG. 31) of arranging at the separated positions is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and abut against each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). ).

  When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the front in the state of FIG. 31, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the region of the deformed elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall 553b, 28 (a) is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area).

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 31, the sliding protrusion 574 is pushed by the second non-transmission wall 553c toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. .. In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, so that the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG.

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 31, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotating arm member 550 is set to a high speed just before reaching the retracted position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second drive device 560, and the speed decrease of the rotating crank member 570 is moderated. When set to, it is not possible to improve the effect.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotation crank member 570 to the state of FIG. 28A without stopping in the state of FIG. You can As a result, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member 570 is decelerated from the state of FIG. 31 to the state of FIG. 28 (a). Can be made Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 that is interlocked with the rotating arm member 550 and the improvement of the durability of the second drive device 560.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotating crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotating arm member 550 can be reciprocally rocked between the retracted position and the extended position.

  From these things, when rotating the rotating crank member 570 at a constant speed in the counterclockwise direction as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b is moved to the reference horizontal line in a half period of the rotation cycle of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved down from a position vertically separated from O by a distance h1 to a position separated a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 during a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the protrusion 541b is maintained at a position of the reference horizontal line O during a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle. Is vertically moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  Here, in the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), and the rotating arm member 550 is extended. In the position, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal state (see FIG. 29A). It is possible to form the downward orthogonal state by rotating the rotary crank member 570 by a predetermined amount clockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 29 (a).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the extended position, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a half turn (180 degrees). Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotating arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the extended position (from FIG. 28A to FIG. 29A). (Refer to FIG. 28A through FIG. 29A) to FIG. 28A) can be made equivalent to the time required to swing from the extended position to the retracted position.

  The relationship between the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 showing the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in time series. 32 to 35, a state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view is illustrated, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotary crank member 570 are illustrated in hidden lines and expanded and contracted. The front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the rendering device 540 are illustrated in phantom lines.

  Note that in FIG. 32 (a), the upward orthogonal state described above is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position), and in FIGS. 32 (b) to 35, the rotating arm from FIG. 32 (a). A state in which the member 550 and the rotary crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount is sequentially illustrated in chronological order.

  In the state of FIG. 32A, the rotary crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state. In this case, the protrusion 541b is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by a distance h1.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 32A (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32A)), sliding The protrusion 574 is moved in the region of the odd-shaped elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall 553b, and reaches the state of FIG. 32 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

  Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 32B, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, so that the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. It Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 32 (b).

  From the state of FIG. 32 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), and is rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12> T11). ), As shown in FIG. 33A, the sliding protrusion 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, in the margin portion D from the state of FIG. 32 (b) until the sliding protrusion 574 reaches the second non-transmission wall portion 553c beyond the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, the rotating arm member 550 is provided. Is not transmitted (non-transmission area), and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O and separated by a distance h4 (h4 <h1).

  From the state of FIG. 33A, the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32A)) is rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13> T12). ), And as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the sliding protrusion 574 abuts on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 which swings downward due to the action of gravity. It That is, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region) from the state of FIG. 33 (b) to the state of FIG. 34 (a). In the state shown in FIG. 33B, the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by a distance h5 (h5 <h4).

  From the state of FIG. 33 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), only the angle T14 (T14≈90 degrees> T13) in the clockwise direction. When it is rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O and separated by a distance h3. The state (see FIG. 34 (a)) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is brought into contact with the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

  Here, the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32B to 34A and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. Although the rotating direction of the moving crank member 570 is different, the rotating region (phase) of the rotating crank member 570 is the same.

  In this case, in the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32 (b) to 34 (a), the inner circumference of the deformed elongated hole 553 is moved in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570. While the surfaces are not in contact with each other, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotation arm member 550 (non-transmission area), while the rotation crank member 570 shown in FIGS. The driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

  Therefore, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed depending on the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570. Accordingly, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, two types of effect modes of the rotating arm member 550 can be formed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIG. 32 (a) and FIG. 34 (a), the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise in a front view. When rotated, the rotating arm member 550 is rocked by free fall depending on the gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 (non-transmission area). On the other hand, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the rotating arm member 550 is swung at a speed depending on the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570 (transmission area).

  Accordingly, even when the rotation speed of the rotation crank member 570 is constant, the rotation crank member 570 can be rotated in the same direction to rotate the rotation crank member 570 in the same phase. The variation of the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

  Further, since an increase in the variation of the swing speed of the rotating arm member 550 is achieved by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (formation of the margin portion D), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550. It is possible to eliminate the need for other members such as a changeover switch for changing, and it is possible to reduce the member cost.

  In this embodiment, the allowance portion D is formed on the pivotal support hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, as compared with the case where the allowance portion D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570, while the sliding protrusion 574 passes the allowance portion D for a predetermined distance. The distance that the protrusion 541b moves downward can be increased. Therefore, the change in the operation of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed can be made remarkable while suppressing the formation range of the margin portion D of the rotating crank member 570.

  From the state of FIG. 34 (a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15> T14). ), The sliding protrusion 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 34B is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the front in the state of FIG. 34B, the sliding protrusion 574 is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Pressed. In this case, since the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 34 (b).

  From the state of FIG. 34 (b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), only the angle T 16 (T 16 ≈180 degrees> T 15) in the clockwise direction. When it is rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state of FIG. 35 (a). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, the sliding protrusion 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding protrusion 574 moves to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  From the state of FIG. 35 (a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), and is rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17> T16). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged vertically above the reference horizontal line O at a position separated by a distance h2 (h2> h3) (FIG. 35). (See (b)). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  Here, when the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 and the swing of the rotary arm member 550 are always linked, it is difficult to shift the start timing of the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550. .. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 are started, it is necessary to generate a large amount of rigidity, which is a force that overcomes the inertia of each member. Therefore, a driving device having a large driving force is required, which may increase the size of the driving device.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the start timings of the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state of FIG. 34 (b) to the state of FIG. 35 (a), only the rotating crank member 570 is rotated until the state of FIG. 35 (a) reaches the state of FIG. 35 (b). The rotating arm member 550 can be started by interlocking with the rotating crank member 570.

  Thus, the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used to start the rotating arm member 550, and thus the driving force required for the second drive device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the second driving device 560 can be downsized.

  When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front in the state of FIG. 35B, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove portion 553a and reaches the state of FIG. 32A. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and abut against each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  From these facts, when rotating the rotating crank member 570 at a constant speed in the clockwise direction as shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the protrusion 541b is used as a reference in a period of 1/4 of the rotation cycle of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position vertically separated from the horizontal line O by a distance h1 to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically upwardly separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the protrusion 541b is vertically separated from the reference horizontal line O in a period of a half of the subsequent rotation cycle. The position is moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  In addition, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially accelerated by the gravitational acceleration when the moving arm descends, and on the other hand, when the moving arm moves upward, the moving speed is always equal to the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. To be done. Thereby, the mode of the speed change of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction effect device 540) can be changed according to the moving direction of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction effect device 540).

  With reference to FIG. 36, a change in the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (expansion / contraction producing device 540) when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise will be described.

  FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A). In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the horizontal axis represents the swing angle in a manner in which the upper orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A) of the rotary crank member 570 is the left end, and the swing angle increases from there to the right, and the vertical axis represents In the figure, the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b is shown.

  In FIG. 36, the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise is shown by a curve CC1, and when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise. The distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b is shown by the curve CW1. The curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusions 541b shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, respectively. For comparison of the curves when the rotating crank members 570 are arranged in the same phase, A curve obtained by horizontally reversing the curve CC1 is shown by a phantom line as a curve CC2. As described above, by comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, by changing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, it is possible to change the ascending speed and the descending speed of the protrusion 541b that is vertically moved by the rotating arm member 550. You can

  As a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotary crank member 570 rotates clockwise, the rotary protrusion 574 rotates until it comes into contact with the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A). A case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) is arranged at the retracted position is shown by a broken line as a curve CW2. It should be noted that this corresponds to the case where the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) sets a large biasing force for swinging the rotating arm member 550 upward. In this case, the period in which the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position can be made longer.

  In the curves CC1 and CW1, in the angular range N1 in which the distance from the horizontal reference line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) is maintained unchanged, the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550 ( 28 (a)), a non-transmission region in which the driving force is not transmitted is formed. The width of the angular range N1 can be adjusted by the formation width of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A).

  Further, in the curve CW1, the angle until the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) comes into contact with the deformed elongated hole 553 (see FIG. 28A) of the rotating arm member 550. In the range N2, a non-transmission area in which the driving force is not transmitted is formed between the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550. The width of the angle range N2 can be adjusted by the formation width of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28A).

  As shown in FIG. 36, a curve is formed between the angle T11 and the angle T14 and the angle T4 and the angle T6 when the rotary crank members 570 (see FIG. 28A) are arranged in the same phase. The shapes of CW1 and curve CC1 are different (the curve CW1 and the curve CC2, which is the laterally inverted curve CC1, do not overlap).

  That is, when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) rotates in the manner of lifting the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) between the angle T4 and the angle T6, the angle is larger. The curve becomes a gentler curve as compared with the case where the rotating crank member 570 rotates in a manner of pushing down the rotating arm member 550 between 11 and the angle T14.

  This is because, in the curve CW1, the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28A) comes into contact with the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553 and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A). 28A is rotated, and in the curve CC1, the sliding protrusion 574 is brought into contact with the selection wall portion 553d of the deformed elongated hole 553 (see FIG. 28A) and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. It depends.

  Returning to FIG. 28A, description will be made. As described above, in the deformed elongated hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the forming angle with the arc S1 is small). The right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is formed in such a manner that the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c intersects with the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle of the arc S1. It

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 that is necessary to accommodate the change amount changes. That is, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount while the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other, the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 is The sliding amount is smaller than the swing amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c are in contact with each other by a predetermined amount.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, when the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

  28 to 35, the case where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in one direction has been described, but the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 can be reversed halfway. As the timing for reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall 553b (for example, FIG. 28A, FIG. 31, FIG. 32A). 32 (b), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position), and the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall 553c (for example, FIG. 29 (a), 29 (b), 34 (b) and 35 (a), the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the projecting position).

  In this case, since the rotating arm member 550 does not come into contact with the rotating crank member 570 in the rotating direction, the resistance applied from the rotating arm member 550 to the rotating crank member 570 when the rotating crank member 570 is reversed in the rotating direction. Can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, since the position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position and the state in which it is arranged in the extended position is arranged, It is possible to facilitate the control of reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 in a state where the moving arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position or the extended position.

  By reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, it is possible to increase the variation of the reciprocating motion of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction.

  For example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by a half turn (see FIG. 29A), and then the rotation is performed. The case where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position by inverting the rotation direction of the dynamic crank member 570 and rotating it clockwise by a half turn is illustrated (see FIG. 28A). That is, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

  In this case, the projection portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570, and from the position h3 (h3 <h1). ) And move down to a position separated by. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 0 degree to 180 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b extends from a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 to a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) in a half period of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570. Move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

  Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and moved upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The same period can be used.

  Further, for example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 32 (a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise by a quarter turn (see FIG. 34 (a)). Next, the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570 is reversed, and the rotation arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position by rotating counterclockwise by a quarter turn (FIG. 32). (See (a)). That is, this is the case where the sliding protrusion 574 moves on the side closer to the shaft support hole 552.

  In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a period of ¼ of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570, and is spaced from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3 It descends to a position separated by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 0 degree to 90 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from a position vertically separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a period of ¼ of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570. Move up to the position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 270 degrees to 360 degrees.

  Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and raised by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The period of movement can be the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened as compared with the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

  When the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves downward, it can be partially freed (from the angle T11 to the angle T13), while the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves upward. In this case, the rotary crank member 570 is always moved at a speed corresponding to the rotation speed. Therefore, even when the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 when the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the moving direction of the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 ( The degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from the angle T11 to the angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

  Next, a difference in swing angle due to a difference in expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an expanded state will be described.

  37 to 39 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. 37 to 39, a case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an expanded state (a case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position) is illustrated. Further, FIG. 37 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 38, the protrusion 541 is in front of the state of FIG. 37. FIG. 39 shows the state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in the front view from the state in FIG. 37. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 29 (a). Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 upward.

  As shown in FIG. 37 to FIG. 39, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state is formed in an arc shape centered around the first shaft 512, and is rotated. It extends along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554 of the arm member 550. In other words, the arcuate hole 554 extends along the swing locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner side surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 is not arranged to face the swinging direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arc-shaped hole 554 does not act as a stopper that stops the swinging of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the swing of the rotary plate 520 is restricted. That is, the rotary plate 520 can be swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can be swung counterclockwise in the front view to the swing angle θ1, and the rotary plate 520 is moved to the second position. It can swing until it comes into contact with the stopper portion 518b, and the projection portion 541b can swing clockwise in a front view up to a swing angle θ2.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, when the protrusion 541b is swung to the left in the front view at the swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. In this case, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550, and the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554, which may cause a malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the protruding portion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 are not rotatable arm members. The protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned by being disposed so as to be engageable with the 550. That is, it is possible to prevent the stretching effect device 540 from being moved in the stretching direction independently of the rotating arm member 550.

  As a result, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the problem that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. As a result, the area in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged can be suppressed, and the area in which other movable members are arranged can be secured accordingly. Further, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

  Further, when the rotating arm member 550 swings in a state in which the protrusion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 shifts, and the protrusion 541b becomes circular. It becomes difficult to return to the arc-shaped hole 554, and there is a risk of malfunction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding protrusion 574 contacts the deformed elongated hole 553, so that the swinging arm member 550 is prevented from swinging (see FIG. 39).

  In addition, a movement locus of a point on the side farther from the rotation axis of the sliding protrusion 574 (a point farthest from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 which is in contact with the sliding protrusion 574. 39 (see FIG. 39), the rotating crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the posture of the rotating arm member 550.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. )), The protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554 by the time the rotary crank member 570 is placed in the state shown in FIG. think of. After the protrusion 541b is returned to the arcuate hole 554, the rotating crank member 570 is further rotated, and even if the rotating arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. There is no possibility that a malfunction will occur in which the arrow cannot return to the arcuate hole 554.

  In this case, when the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction producing device 540 are respectively swung, the rotating crank member 570 is stopped or started according to the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554. There is no need, and rotation of the rotating crank member 570 can be continued. In other words, it is only necessary to control the timing of swinging the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the rotating crank member 570 does not need to be controlled, and the rotation crank member 570 may be kept rotating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the control load of a complicated operation of swinging the expansion / contraction producing device 540 and the rotating arm member 550 at different timings.

  In the present embodiment, the tip portion 554a is formed so that the width of the arc-shaped hole 554 can be increased toward the opening end (the left end in FIG. 39) of the arc-shaped hole 554. As a result, it is possible to allow a large amount of positional deviation (positional deviation in the expansion / contraction direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554, and the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e. A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be secured.

  Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state that is a state between the extended state and the contracted state will be described. From the state where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the expanded state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b is moved corresponding to the arcuate hole 554 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise, and the expansion / contraction effect is generated. The device 540 forms the intermediate state.

  40 to 42 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. 40 to 42, a case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (a case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged between the extended position and the retracted position) is illustrated. In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than that when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  Further, FIG. 40 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 41, the protrusion 541 is in front of the state of FIG. 40. FIG. 42 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state in FIG. 40.

  The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 28B. Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 upward.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the arcuate hole 554 moving upward due to the swinging of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546 as described later. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state have a radius of curvature. Although the central axes of the two coincide with each other on the upper side, the radii of curvature and postures are different from each other. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the forming angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arc-shaped hole 554 functions as a stopper that stops the swing of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). ..

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the protrusion 541b is not in contact with the arcuate hole 554. That is, since the rotary plate 520 can be swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can be swung counterclockwise in the front view up to the swing angle θ3 (angle θ3 = Angle θ1).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554. In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the upper side surface of the rotating arm member 550 to prevent the expansion / contraction effect device 540 from changing in the expansion / contraction direction. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 42, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is shaken. Motion is stopped.

  That is, the rotary plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can swing clockwise in a front view up to a swing angle θ4 (angle θ4 <angle θ2). .. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. Accordingly, by varying the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, it is possible to increase the variation of the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. Note that, in the state of FIG. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e is in contact with the main body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550.

  Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state will be described. From the state in which the expansion / contraction production device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), by swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise, the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554, and the expansion / contraction production is performed. The device 540 creates a contracted state.

  43 to 45 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. 43 to 45, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position) is illustrated. In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  In addition, FIG. 43 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 44, the protrusion 541 is in front of the state of FIG. 43. FIG. 45 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state in FIG. 43. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. Therefore, in FIG. 43 to FIG. 45, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O upward by the distance h1.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the arcuate hole 554 moving upward due to the swinging of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both the function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and the function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state are different from each other, The central axis of the radius of curvature is reversed. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is below the protrusion 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arc-shaped hole 554 is disposed above the arc-shaped hole 554. In this case, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the forming angle α2 (angle α2> angle α1), and the arc-shaped hole 554 functions as a stopper that stops the swing of the protrusion 541b ( 44 and 45).

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541 b is brought into contact with the second stopper surface 554 c of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotary plate 520 is not rocked until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the protrusion 541b is rockable counterclockwise in front view up to the rocking angle θ5. (Angle θ5 <angle θ1 = angle θ3).

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the protrusion 541b abuts on the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotary plate 520 is not rocked until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can be rocked clockwise in a front view up to a rocking angle θ6 (angle θ6 <angle θ4. <Angle θ2). Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the swing width of the stretch effect producing device 540.

  Here, the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the formation angle α2 of the arcuate hole 554 in the contracted state are formed larger than the formation angle α1 of the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the intermediate state. It

  In the relationship between the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the protrusion 541b is swung in such a manner as to traverse the arcuate hole 554, and thus the protrusion 541b. The swing angle of is minimized. On the other hand, in the relationship between the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554, if the formation angle is 0 degrees (see FIGS. 37 to 39), the protrusion 541b extends along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554. As a result, the protrusion 541b has a maximum swing angle. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1 <formation angle α2. ).

  As described above, by changing the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction producing device 540, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is changed, and at that time, the inner peripheral surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 (the first stopper surface 554b, the second stopper surface 554b, The stopper surface 554c and the third stopper surface 554d) function as stoppers that regulate the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. Accordingly, the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554 can also be used as a portion that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 has different expansion / contraction states. Therefore, the space for disposing the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be suppressed.

  Further, the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by disposing the rotating arm member 550 at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where the fixed stopper is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the stopper remains on the front face of the third symbol display device 81 even when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position. Can be prevented. Accordingly, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, other members can be arranged on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81, and therefore other movable members (for example, the slide operation unit 700). It is possible to secure an overhanging space for the column member 720).

  Further, the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 functions as a stopper that restricts the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is driven by the second drive by swinging the rotating arm member 550. And a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion / contraction effect device 540 to perform an expansion / contraction operation. As a result, the functions can be integrated and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. The tilting operation unit 600 is a unit that swings (tilts) the effect member 620 (see FIG. 12), and the slide operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilting operation unit 600 in the left-right direction. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilt operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilt operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. Note that FIGS. 46 and 47 show a state in which the column members 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged at the retracted position.

  FIG. 48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. Note that in FIGS. 48 and 49, the tilting operation unit 600 is illustrated without being disassembled for easy understanding.

  The slide operation unit 700 is formed to be slidable in the left-right direction by fastening one end to a base member 710 formed in a plate shape elongated in the left-right direction and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710. A column member 720, and a slide rail 730 in which one end portion is fastened and fixed to the column member 720 and the other end portion to which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed is formed to be vertically expandable and contractible, A driving force is generated to move the connecting member 740, which is slidably formed on the rear rail portion 716 of the main body portion 710 and is pivotally supported by the pivot support projection 612 of the tilting operation unit 600, and the column member 720 in the left-right direction. The drive device 750 and a back cover member 760 formed on the back side of the drive device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710 are mainly provided.

  The base member 710 is a member that forms the skeleton of the slide operation unit 700, and is formed so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and the slide plate 711 to which the support member 720 is fastened and fixed from the rear side, and a rear view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 is provided in the lower left portion having a circular cross section and in which the fixed shaft portion 753a is supported, and a shaft support hole provided in the lower right portion of the base member 710 in a rear view in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the left-right direction. 712, and the slide shaft supporting hole 713 in which the moving shaft portion 754a is slidably supported, and the locking portion 725 of the strut member 720 which is vertically swingable by a solenoid. Of the lever member 714 that restricts the movement of the base member 710, and the upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740 that is provided in the upper end portion of the base member 710 so as to project toward the front side in a downward arc shape in section. The front rail portion 715 mainly comprises a rear rail portion 716 through plate portion 741b is inserted in the recessed by the coupling member 740 from the rear arc-shaped cross section in a front rail portion 715, a.

  Since the lever member 714 restricts the lateral slide movement of the column member 720 that is fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711, the driving force of the drive device 750 for maintaining the tilting operation unit 600 at the retracted position is unnecessary. You can

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting operation unit 600 is moved along the formation direction (arc trajectory) of the front rail portion 715 and the back rail portion 716, the right and left of the column member 720 connected to the tilting movement unit 600 is disposed. The sliding movement in the direction can occur due to the action of gravity applied to the tilting movement unit 600. For example, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting operation unit 600 is directed obliquely downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715. Therefore, even if the moving direction of the column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the left-right direction along the moving direction of the slide plate 711, the column member 720 may be moved by gravity. In this embodiment, when the lever member 714 is swung downward, the lever member 714 is engaged with the locking portion 725 of the column member 720, and the movement of the column member 720 in the left-right direction is restricted. Therefore, the driving force of the drive device 750 is reduced. Even if the above is unnecessary, the column member 720 can be maintained at the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the drive device 750 can be improved.

  The column member 720 has a main body 721 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a slide plate 711 of a base member 710 that is continuously provided in the lower end of the main body 721 in the left-right direction and is provided in the front-rear direction. A second fastening part 722 through which a screw to be fastened and fastened is inserted, and a second fastening part in which the slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the left end portion of the main body part 721 in a front view in a vertically continuous manner. The portion 723, a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723, and a slide hole 724 formed on the right side portion of the main body portion 721 when viewed from the front, and the right side of the main body portion 721. A lower lid part in which a belt 755 of the driving device 750 is sandwiched between a hook-shaped locking part 725 projecting upward from the lower end part and engaging with the lever member 714, and the main part 721, which is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main part 721. 726 and the main body 7 1. A rolling portion 727 projecting from the rear side of the lower end of the rear cover member 1 and capable of rolling on the inner peripheral surface of the slide recessed portion 764 of the rear cover member 760, and suspended from the upper end of the main body 721 to the lower front. And a coil spring 728 connected to the hook-shaped portion 617 of the base member 610 at its lower end.

  The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support member 720 in a posture capable of expanding and contracting in the direction in which the second fastening portions 723 are continuously provided.

  The slide hole 724 is a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the continuous direction of the second fastening portion 723, and is a long hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can suppress the lateral displacement of the vertically moving tilting operation unit 600 (relative rotation of the tilting operation unit 600 with respect to the column member 720).

  The lower lid portion 726 has a tooth shape extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile has a shape that meshes with the tooth profile formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 of the driving device 750. This can prevent the column member 720 from slipping on the belt 755 of the drive device 750.

  The rolling portion 727 is rotatably inserted into the slide recessed portion 764 of the back cover 760 to suppress the frictional resistance, and also suppresses the inclination in the front-rear direction about the lower end of the column member 720 as an axis. be able to.

  The coil spring 728 is an urging force that moves the tilting operation unit 600 upward. Since the tilting motion unit 600 is constantly loaded with the biasing force from the coil spring 728, the tilting motion unit 600 is prevented from falling downward due to gravity.

  The connecting member 740 is a base that is supported by a triangular plate-shaped main body member 741 that is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting protrusion 612 of the tilting movement unit 600, and a rolling shaft 741c that is provided so as to project from the main body member 741. A pair of cylindrical upper rolling members 742 that are rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. Of the front cover member 743 and the lower half of the front cover member 743, which is disposed on the lower portion of the front cover member 743 on the back side, is fitted and held by the front cover member 743 so that the upper half of the front cover member 743 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. And a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 that is moved.

  The main body member 741 is a member formed in a triangular plate shape, is a circular recess provided in the upper end portion from the rear surface, and is a shaft rotatably supported by the shaft support projection 612 of the tilting operation unit 600. A supporting portion 741a, an inserting plate portion 741b that is a plate-like member that is provided on the lower end portion so as to project toward the front side, and is slidably inserted into the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710, and the shaft supporting portion 741a to the inserting plate portion. It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c protruding in a column shape from the position axisymmetric with respect to a perpendicular drawn to 741b toward the front side and having an upper rolling member 742 rotatably supported.

  Since the insertion plate portion 741b is inserted into the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710, the connecting member 740 is formed to be movable along the rear rail portion 716. Therefore, the tilting operation unit 600 pivotally supported by the pivot support portion 741a is also formed so as to be movable along the back rail portion 716.

  The rolling shafts 741c are formed in pairs at positions that are line-symmetric with respect to the perpendicular line drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c abut on the front rail portion 715 formed in an arc shape via the upper rolling portion 742, the load applied from the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 to the connecting member 740 ( The force in the normal direction of the arc passes through the shaft supporting portion 741a. Therefore, the shaft supporting protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stably held by the connecting member 740.

  The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting portion 741 a and abuts on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the upper rolling portion 742 is rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, the frictional resistance generated when the connecting member 740 slides can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slide movement can be suppressed.

  The lower rolling member 744 has a lower half portion rotatably fitted around the lower portion of the front cover member 743 and an upper end portion abutting on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 slides along the front rail portion 715, the lower rolling portion 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 when the connecting member 740 slides, and to suppress the driving force required for the sliding movement.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 and the lower rolling member 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, it is possible to maintain the state in which the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched by the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744 of the connecting member 740 while suppressing frictional resistance.

  Here, since the center of gravity of the tilting operation unit 600 is formed upward as described later, there is a risk of tilting in the front-back direction. In this case, the connecting member 740 sandwiches the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 with the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744, so that the tilting motion unit 600 can be tilted in both the front and rear directions. , Can generate resistance. This makes it easier to maintain the posture of the tilting operation unit 600.

  The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740, and thereby pivotally supports the upper rolling member 742 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  The driving device 750 includes a driving motor 751 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and that generates a driving force that slides the support member 720, a driving gear 752 that is axially supported by the driving motor 751, and the driving gear 752. A shaft fixing gear 753 which is meshed with the belt 755 and a shaft moving gear 754 which is arranged apart from the shaft fixing gear 753 and around which the belt 755 is wound and a rotation shaft 754a is slidably movable. A belt 755 wound around the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 and moved by the rotation of the shaft fixing gear 753, and a coil for generating a biasing force for moving the shaft moving gear 754 in a direction away from the shaft fixing gear 753. A spring 756 is mainly provided.

  The shaft fixing gear 753 is a columnar member serving as a rotating shaft, and includes a fixed shaft portion 753a which is inserted into the shaft supporting hole 712 of the base member 710. Further, the shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754a which is a columnar member serving as a rotating shaft and is inserted into the slide shaft supporting hole 713 of the base member 710.

  The shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. A tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755. Accordingly, slippage between the belt 755 and the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the rotation amount of the shaft fixing gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755.

  One end of the coil spring 756 is fixed to a hook-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710 in rear view, and the other end is fixed to a case covering the shaft moving gear 754. .. As a result, an urging force that moves the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft supporting hole 712 can be generated, and appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755, so that the belt 755 can move the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear. It is possible to prevent the gear 754 from falling off.

  The back cover member 760 is a member that covers the drive device 750 on the back surface of the base member 710, and includes a main body portion 761 formed in a box shape with the front side open, and a fixed shaft portion 753a on the bottom surface of the main body portion 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a recess for receiving, a moving recessed portion 763 that is a recess that extends in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and that receives the moving shaft portion 754a, and a moving recessed portion 763 that extends in the left-right direction and receives the rolling portion 727. A slide recessed portion 764 that is a recess is mainly provided.

  The slide recessed portion 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 rolls on the upper and lower inner side surfaces thereof. The frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the column member 720 is suppressed, and the column member 720 is suppressed from tilting in the front-rear direction. That is, when the column member 720 tilts in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 abuts on either the upper inner surface or the lower inner surface of the slide recessed portion 764. Thereby, the tilt of the column member 720 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

  Next, the tilting operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600.

  The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-shaped base member 610 fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, and a box-shaped effect member 620 whose lower end is pivotally supported by the base member 610. A first driving device 630 that generates a swinging driving force of the effect member 620, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first driving device 630 to the effect member 620, and an abutting transmission of the transmission member 640. A torsion spring 650 that generates a biasing force that moves the member 640, and a second drive device 660 that mainly generates a driving force that opens and closes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the effect member 620 are mainly provided. ..

  The base member 610 includes a main body portion 611, which is formed into a vertically long plate shape, to which the slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed, and a cylindrical support portion of the connecting member 740, which is provided in a cylindrical shape from the front side of the main body portion 611. 741a is pivotally supported, and a pivot hole 626 of the effect member 620 is pivotally supported so that the pivot shaft 626 of the effect member 620 is a circular hole bored in the front-rear direction vertically above the pivot support protrusion 612. The first shaft support hole 613 and a circular hole formed in the front-rear direction vertically above the first shaft support hole 613, and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is pivotally supported in a swingable manner. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body portion 611 and inserted into a slide hole 724 of a column member 720 so as to be vertically slidable, and an insertion hole through which a drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted. 616 and from the lower end of the body 611 A hook-shaped hook portion 617 that extends toward the side, mainly comprising.

  The second shaft support hole 614 is provided with a lower receiving plate portion 614a protruding from its lower edge toward the front side in an arcuate cross section. The lower receiving plate portion 614a guides the rotation of the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed to have a left-right width that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the tubular portion 642 (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Since the auxiliary member 615 is inserted into the slide hole 724, the lateral inclination of the base member 610 can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid vertically.

  The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion to which one end of the coil spring 728 is hooked and a biasing force is applied.

  The effect member 620 and the second drive device 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a front exploded perspective view of effect member 620 and second drive device 660. The liquid crystal device disposed inside the effect member 620 is shown in phantom lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for describing the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660.

  The effect member 620 is a box-shaped member in which the liquid crystal device is disposed, and has a rectangular plate-shaped main body member 621 and a main body member 621 that extends from above and below the main body member 621 and covers the main body member 621. The upper and lower cover members 622 that can be bent, the left and right cover members 623 that are plate-shaped members that are attached from both side surfaces of the upper and lower cover members 622, and that form a rectangular box shape with the upper and lower cover members 622 open forward. A first curtain member 624 that is a member that opens and closes the opening and that is connected to the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660 and moves, and a member that opens and closes the front opening together with the first curtain member 624. A second curtain member 625 that is moved by being pulled by the curtain member 624; a columnar swing shaft portion 626 that is provided so as to project from the lower rear portion of the main body member 621; Mainly it includes center of gravity G (see FIG. 53) is formed above (higher position) than the pivot shaft portion 626. The center of gravity G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

  The main body member 621 includes a cylindrical sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that is provided above the swing shaft portion 626 so as to project to the back side in the vertical direction. The sliding shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

  The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that house the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the driving device 660. ..

  The left and right cover members 623 are provided with slide grooves 623a which are formed in a groove shape on the inner side surface and which allow the slide protrusions 625c of the second curtain members 625 to slide.

  The slide groove 623a is formed by connecting curved grooves formed in an arc shape to the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. As a result, the second curtain member 625 slides along the shape of the slide groove 623a in such a manner that linear movement and curved movement occur in sequence.

  The first curtain member 624 is a member that is vertically swung about an opening / closing shaft 664 of the second drive device 660, and has a body portion 624a formed by bending a plate material in a C-shaped cross section, and the body portion thereof. A fitting portion 624b that projects from the end portion of 624a in the left-right direction and is fitted into the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660 so that it cannot rotate relative to one another, and one end portion near the fitting portion 624b is the main body portion. A connecting member 624c is pivotally supported by the 624 and has the other end connected to the connecting protrusion 625b of the second curtain member 625.

  The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and is moved in the vertical direction. The main body portion 625a is formed in a plate shape having a C-shaped cross section, and the main body portion 624a has a C-shaped cross section. A connecting protrusion 625b protruding from the end in the left-right direction and connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left-right cover member 623 protruding in the left-right direction from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body 625a. 623a, and a slide protrusion 625c.

  The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 that is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the effect member 620, a drive gear 662 that is axially supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear of the drive gear 662 is meshed with each other. A pair of transmission gears 663 that are rotated in opposite directions, and an opening / closing shaft that is inserted into the transmission gears 663 so as to be relatively non-rotatable and rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by a shaft support mechanism (not shown). 664 and a transmission member 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of open / close shafts 664 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

  The transmission member 665 includes a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the first curtain member 624 is vertically swung about the opening / closing shaft 664.

  It returns to FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 and demonstrates. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 in which a drive shaft is inserted into an insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631. And a worm wheel 633 in the shape of a helical gear that meshes with the worm 632.

  The worm 632 is formed by a double thread. In the present embodiment, since the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, the worm wheel 633 makes one revolution while the worm 632 makes ten revolutions. Accordingly, the rotation angle of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution can be significantly reduced.

  The worm wheel 633 is provided with a locking projection 633 a that is projected from the center of the rotation shaft and is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610 and that is locked to the tubular portion 643 of the transmission member 640 so as not to rotate relative to it. Prepare It should be noted that the transmission of the driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is structurally limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 actively rotates, the force is reduced to the worm wheel 633). 632 in the axial direction). As a result, the load that the drive motor 631 receives when stopping the worm wheel 633 can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped in a state where the power of the drive motor 631 is cut off, and the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

  The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53A and 53B are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. Note that, in FIGS. 53A and 53B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the description of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. To do. Further, FIG. 53A shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642. In this state, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 causes the transmission member 640 to move. Balanced in the rocking direction. In FIG. 53B, the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined amount and the effect member 620 is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state of FIG. 53A.

  The transmission member 640 is a member that is oscillated by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50), and includes a main body portion 641 formed in the shape of a long rectangular rod, and one end portion of the main body portion 641. In the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 642, which extends in the axial direction and in which the locking protrusion 633a of the first drive device 630 is locked, and the other end of the main body 641 that extends in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 642. A sliding hole 643 formed as a hole, an abutting portion 644 arranged on both sides of the main body 641 in the swinging direction, and the abutting portion 644 and the front side surface of the main body 641 are connected to each other. A front arc plate 645 having a wide arc shape and a back arc plate 646 having a wide arc shape that connects the contact portion 644 and the rear side surface of the main body 641 are mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate 645, and the back arc plate 646 are arranged so as to surround the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650. This can prevent the torsion spring 650 from falling off (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

  The tubular portion 642 is axially supported by the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked by the locking projection 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first drive device 630 so as not to rotate relative to it. It

  The sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the sliding hole 643. Accordingly, when the transmission member 640 is swung about the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is rotated. While being slid in the sliding hole 643 (sliding in the axial direction), the effect member 620 is swung about the first shaft support hole 613.

  By swinging the effect member 620 in this manner, it is possible to suppress the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the drive motor 631 is rotated by the minimum unit of resolution of control of the drive device. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method in which a gear is directly connected to the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the driving force of the drive motor is transmitted to the gear can be considered. However, in this case, the angle P0 of the minimum unit of control resolution of the drive motor (see FIG. 53 (a), the angle is shown several times larger than the actual angle P0 for easy understanding. The amount of movement X1 by which the center of gravity of the effect member 620 deviates in the left-right direction from the inverted state when the effect member 620 is rotated becomes larger as the center of gravity of the effect member 620 moves away from the swing shaft portion 626. Therefore, as the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is separated from the swing shaft portion 626, it becomes more difficult to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the effect member 620, and the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is placed right above the swing shaft portion 626. It becomes difficult to make the effect member 620 stand still in the state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the rendering member 620 is connected to the sliding shaft portion 621a of the rendering member 620. The length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the tubular portion 642 which is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640 is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626 which is the swing shaft of the effect member 620. It is formed shorter than.

  Therefore, even when the effect member 620 is long in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the angle P0 (see FIG. 53 (a)), which is the minimum unit of resolution of control of the drive device, can be easily understood. Therefore, the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity of the effect member 620 when the drive device is operated at an angle several times larger than the actual angle P0) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the movable member stand still in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged right above the first axis.

  As a method of swinging the effect member 620, gear teeth are formed on the effect member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear that meshes with the gear teeth is rotated by a drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 can be considered. However, in this case, the larger the swing range of the effect member 620, the larger the range in which the gear teeth on the arc are formed in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the effect member 620 is formed in a thin shape in the swinging direction, the gear teeth on the arc protrude from the effect member 620, which hinders the effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 becomes low.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the performance member 620, the tubular portion 642 that is the swing shaft is the swing shaft portion 626 that is the swing shaft of the performance member 620. Is arranged vertically above and is connected to the swing shaft portion 621a at the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Since the effect member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 with respect to the swing range of the effect member 620 can be suppressed near the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Accordingly, even if the effect member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, the transmission member 640 can be prevented from protruding from the effect member 620, and the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 can be improved.

  The lower surface of the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640. As a result, the weight of the effect member 620 is applied not only to the swing shaft portion 626 but also to the transmission member 640. That is, a force that opposes the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the swing shaft portion 626 but also from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported by the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 at two points, and the radial force applied to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be suppressed. ..

  Here, since the effect member 620 is in the normal state in the inverted state shown in FIG. 53A, it is possible to quickly return to the inverted state after the transmission member 640 is swung and swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state. Is desirable.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view at the swing angle φ1 from the state shown in FIG. 53 (a), the effect member 620. Is swung at a swing angle φ2 (φ2 <φ1).

  That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 swung by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53A).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a long hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed in the axial direction of the transmission member 640, and the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the sliding hole 643. Then, since the swing axes of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are different, and the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, the transmission member 640. The more the oscillates, the more the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the oscillating shaft of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53A) is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state ( The arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in FIG. 54B) is made shorter than the arm length R2.

  That is, the arm length of the transmission member 640 is shortened as it approaches the inverted state, and the swing length of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined angle is constant. Compared with the case of, the size can be made smaller as it approaches the inverted state. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the drive motor 631 is not changed, the operation speed of the effect member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position, while the operation speed of the effect member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the effect member 620 is inverted. It is possible to make it easier to stand still in the state (the production member 620 can be easily stopped and controlled in a state where the center of gravity of the production member 620 is arranged vertically above the first shaft support hole 613).

  With reference to FIG. 55, the swing of the rendering member 620 with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the rendering member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The change in angle will be described.

  FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53 (a)) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53 (a)). In FIG. 55, the rotating shaft M1 corresponds to the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53A) that is the rotating shaft of the effect member 620, and the rotating shaft M2 is the tubular portion 642 that is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53A). The straight lines a1 to a4 are schematic representations of the arrangement of the transmission member 640, and are straight lines drawn radially from the rotation axis M2. The straight line a1 passes through the rotation axis M1 and the straight lines a2 to a4 are the straight line a1. Are formed in such a manner that the formation angles of are sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angles formed by adjacent straight lines of the straight lines a1 to a4 are set to 15 degrees.

  An arc drawn with the radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53 (a)) about the rotation axis M2 is shown by the arc SR1, and the arm length R2 about the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54 (b)). An arc drawn with a radius equal to is shown by arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn around the rotation axis M1 and has a radius of a length obtained by adding the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2 to the arm length R1.

  These arcs assume the locus of the connecting position of the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53A). In the present embodiment, the sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53 (a)) as the connecting position is provided so as to project from the effect member 620, and the connecting position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. .. In addition, when the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, the effect member 620 is formed with a long hole in the axial direction, and the transmission member 640 changes its position. It is assumed that the shaft inserted into the long hole is provided in a protruding manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is shown as an intersection P10, the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is shown as an intersection P11, and the intersection of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is shown as an intersection P12. It is illustrated by.

  Similarly, the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is shown as an intersection P20, the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is shown as an intersection P21, and the intersection of the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is shown as an intersection P22. An intersection point of the straight line a3 and the circular arc SR0 is shown as an intersection point P30, an intersection point of the straight line a3 and the circular arc SR1 is shown as an intersection point P31, and an intersection point of the straight line a3 and the circular arc SR2 is shown as an intersection point P32. An intersection point of the straight line a4 and the circular arc SR0 is shown by an intersection point P40, an intersection point of the straight line a4 and the circular arc SR1 is shown by an intersection point P41, and an intersection point of the straight line a4 and the circular arc SR2 is shown by an intersection point P42. The intersection P10 and the intersection P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection P40 and the intersection P42 are arranged at the same position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P10 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 is shown as an angle A10, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P11. The angle formed by the rotation axis M1 and the straight line passing through the intersection point P21 is illustrated as an angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P12 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 is illustrated as the angle A12. To be done.

  Similarly, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 is illustrated as an angle A20, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21 and the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31. An angle formed by a straight line passing through is shown by an angle A21, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 is shown as an angle A22. An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P40 is illustrated by an angle A30, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P41. The angle formed by and is indicated by an angle A31, and the angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P42 is indicated by an angle A32. It should be noted that these angles correspond to the swing angle of the effect member 620.

  Here, the ratio of (distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is (1: 2.32: 2.54) in the present embodiment. When the angle is actually measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when swinging the transmission member 640 between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the rendering member 640 is the largest when the transmission member 640 and the rendering member 620 are connected along the arc SR0. The case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR2 is formed as described above (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

  The angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, the angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and the angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR2. This is lower than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A22 and the angle A20 is smaller than the difference between the angle A20 and the angle A21 (the angle A20 is closer to the angle A22 than the angle A21).

  The angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, the angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and the angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a2 and the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR1. This exceeds the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A12 and the angle A10 is larger than the difference between the angle A10 and the angle A11 (the angle A10 is closer to the angle A11 than the angle A12).

  From these, by setting the locus of the connecting position of the transmission member 640 and the rendering member 620 (see FIG. 53A) to the arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 swings at a constant speed, the rendering member It is understood that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. That is, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 is brought close to the angular velocity (high speed side) when the locus of the connecting position of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a1. The angular velocity when arranged can be brought close to the angular velocity (low speed side) when the locus of the connecting position of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR1.

  Further, when the ratio of each angle is calculated, the angle A22 / angle A32 is 0.98, and the angle A12 / angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21 / angle A31 is 0.98, and the angle A11 / angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the locus of the connecting position of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at a constant speed. In this case, the deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

  On the other hand, the angle A20 / angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10 / angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the locus of the connecting position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is the arc SR0 (arc about the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant speed. The deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when it is swung toward the state can be 3 to 5%. That is, the deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased as compared with the case where the loci of the connecting positions are the arcs SR1 and SR2 (the arcs centering on the rotation axis M2).

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is brought into contact with the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so that the force of the gravity G of the effect member 620 causes the swing axis. The part 626 and the tubular part 642 are hung vertically downward. Therefore, the force of the component in the direction in which the effect member 620 is swung is not generated due to the gravity of the effect member 620. Therefore, even if the power of the first drive device 630 is shut off, the attitude of the effect member 620 is maintained in the inverted state. You can Thereby, the durability of the first drive device 630 can be improved.

  Further, since the force of the gravity G of the effect member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, the rotation resistance of the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be increased. It is possible to easily maintain the posture of the effect member 620 in the inverted state.

  The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring that generates an urging force in the direction in which the coil portion 651 is rewound (the direction in which the transmission member 640 is pushed back) along with the swing of the transmission member 640, and the twist shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. A coil portion 651 wound around, a biasing arm portion 652 extending along both side surfaces of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 in the swinging direction, an end portion of the coil portion 651 and an end portion of the biasing arm portion 652. A connecting arm portion 653 that connects the portion through the space between the tubular portion 642 and the swing shaft portion 626 is mainly provided.

  The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter that is about three times the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the urging arm 652 is swung and a load that causes the coil 651 to contract and deform is generated, the amount of deformation of the coil 651 can be secured, and the urging arm 652 and the connecting arm 653 are deformed. Can be suppressed.

  The biasing arm portion 652 is surrounded by the main body portion 641, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the urging arm portion 652 from falling off (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

  Further, the biasing arm portion 652 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the plane on which the transmission member 640 swings. Therefore, a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated from the biasing arm portion 652 arranged in the swinging direction of the transmission member 640, and the biasing arm portion arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 640 in the swinging direction. 652 is prevented from moving by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. As a result, the torsion spring 650 is formed so as to be able to generate a biasing force in the direction in which the transmission member 640 is pushed back regardless of the swing direction of the transmission member 640.

  A bent portion 653a that is bent on the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed at the connecting portion of the biasing arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653. In this case, the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650, as described later, so that the bent portion 653a is extended (see FIG. 54 (b)). As a result, the contact position between the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes far from the tubular portion 642, and the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 is increased. You can

  With reference to FIG. 54, a change in the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 and pushing back the transmission member 640 will be described. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 53 is appropriately used to explain the change in the biasing force generated from the torsion spring 650. refer.

  Further, in FIG. 54A, from the state of FIG. 53B, the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in front view, and the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side in front view of the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. A state in which the pressure member starts to be pressed against the inner side surface is illustrated. In FIG. 54 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 54 (a), and the bending portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled. The extended state is shown.

  In the state of FIG. 54A, a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated in the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side in the front view of the torsion spring 650. This urging force is the sum of the urging force generated from the coil portion 651 and the bending portion 653a.

  That is, in the state of FIG. 53 (b), the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the bending portion 653a arranged on the left side in the front view of the pair of bending portions 653a, so the biasing arm of the torsion spring 650 on the left side in the front view. As the biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640, only the biasing force from the coil portion 651 is generated in the portion 652.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54A, in addition to the urging force having the coil portion 651 as the starting point, the urging force is generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 having the bending portion 653a as the starting point. Therefore, the spring constant of the biasing arm portion 652 can be increased. It should be noted that the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a causes the length of the portion to be deformed to be shorter than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so the unit deformation amount of the transmission member 640. The biasing force generated by the hit can be increased.

  In the state of FIG. 54B, the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pushed by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640, so that the angle formed by the biasing arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 is widened. As a result, the contact position length L1 which is the distance between the contact position of the main body 641 of the transmission member 640 and the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the tubular portion 642 in the state of FIG. 54B, the similar contact position length L2 in the state of FIG. 54B is separated from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. That is, the contact position length is extended. As a result, the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is lengthened, so that the moment applied from the torsion spring 650 to the transmission member 640 can be increased.

  Therefore, for example, when the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially equal in the state of FIG. 54 (a) and the state of FIG. 54 (b), the load on the transmission member 640 is further increased in FIG. 54 (b). The generated moment can be increased. Therefore, the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 can be pushed back more easily.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is small when the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (effect member 620) from the retracted position is small, and the swing angle is large. It is increased elastically, and is increased more than the elastic increase with the state of FIG. 54 (a) as a boundary. Therefore, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 required when the effect member 620 is set to the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54B) is determined, the torsion spring only elastically increases. Compared with, the biasing force when the swing angle is small can be set smaller (a soft spring can be used).

  As a result, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the operation speed at the time of starting the swing of the effect member 620 is reduced by the biasing force of the torsion spring 650, and it is possible to increase the operation speed at the time of starting the operation of the effect member 620. ..

  Further, since the urging force is increased by an elastic amount or more after the state of FIG. 54 (a), the swing angle of the effect member 620 is set to the state of FIG. 54 (a) or more, The deceleration acceleration of the effect member 620 can be increased. Thereby, the timing of starting deceleration of the effect member 620 can be delayed between the swinging motions of the effect member 620. Therefore, the swing angle at which the effect member 620 can be swung at a high speed can be increased, and the effect of the tilting operation unit 600 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the sliding operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 56 is a front view of the tilt motion unit 600 and the slide motion unit 700. In FIG. 56, a state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position is illustrated by an imaginary line, and a state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is slid from the retracted position by a predetermined amount is illustrated by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, a connecting member 740 that connects the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700, which are formed to be slidable in the vertical direction, is formed to be movable in the extending direction of the front rail portion 715. .. Here, since the weight of the tilting motion unit 600 is loaded on the connecting member 740, when the tilting motion unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the tilting motion unit 600 is gravitationally moved to the left along the front rail portion 715 when viewed from the front. Will be urged towards you. Therefore, in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 at the retracted position, it is conceivable to fix the driving device 750.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be vertically swingable, and when the lever member 714 is swung downward, the lever member 714 is engaged with the locking portion 725 of the column member 720, and the left and right columns of the column member 720 are engaged. The sliding movement in the direction is restricted.

  This makes it possible to mechanically maintain the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position, so that when the tilting unit 600 is placed in the retracted position, the tilting unit 600 is stopped with the drive device 750 stopped. Can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

  It should be noted that from the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is located at the retracted position, the lever member 714 is swung upward and the driving device 750 is operated, whereby the support member 720 can be moved, and the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in the left-right direction. You can slide it to.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position in the inverted state, the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600.

  Here, since the tilt movement unit 600 slides along the front rail portion 715, the tilt movement unit 600 moves while being slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position (see the imaginary line in FIG. 56) in FIG. Always has a vertical component.

  Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600 and the pivotal support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 are displaced in the vertical direction, a load may be applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting operation unit 600. This is the same when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid in the opposite direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shaft supporting portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied from the connecting member 740 to the tilting operation unit 600 and the center of gravity G are. It is formed on the same line. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting operation unit 600, and to stabilize the attitude of the tilting operation unit 600.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (pivoting motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 on the sliding motion of the sliding motion unit 700 will be described. FIG. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. Note that FIG. 57 illustrates a state where the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is swung to the state of FIG. 54 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 57, when the effect member 620 is swung counterclockwise in the front view, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged on the left side in the front view with respect to the connecting member 740. Therefore, the acceleration to the left in the front view, which is applied to the connecting member 740, is increased.

  In this case, the driving force required to slide the tilting operation unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, so that the driving motor 751 of the driving device 750 can be downsized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, a tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface has been described, but the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 2640. 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641a that abuts on the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  58 (a), 58 (b) and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. 58 (a), 58 (b) and 59, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown by imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 58A shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 58B shows the inverted state of FIG. 58A. From the front, the transmission member 2640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and a state in which the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is brought into contact with the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is shown in FIG. 59. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 58B is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58A), the main body portion 2641 is pressed against the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 2641 is moved. The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that swings in a direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 is swung and the biasing arm portion 652 is deformed, the coil portion 651 is contracted and deformed by the connecting arm portion 653 connected to the deformed biasing arm portion 652. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the urging force for swinging the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, due to the difference in swing angle between the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 2640, the contact position between the main body portion 2641 of the transmission member 2640 and the biasing arm portion 652 ( The tip position of the biasing arm portion 652 is changed by the swing of the transmission member 2640. That is, as the transmission member 2640 swings, the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 is moved to the tip end side of the main body portion 2641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise in a front view in a state where the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the distal end portion of the biasing arm portion 642. The biasing arm portion 642 is restricted by the abutting portion 2641a from moving toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung while the transfer arm portion 642 is restricted in movement by the contact portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, the movement of the biasing arm portion 642 to the tip end side of the main body portion 2641 is restricted, so that the base side (bending portion 653a side) of the biasing arm portion 642 is moved downward. As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction in which the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced (the direction in which the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 increases).

  That is, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state of FIG. 59 can be increased as compared with the case without the abutting portion 2641a. Thereby, the degree of change in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (the increasing rate of the biasing force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) is increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 compared to the state shown in FIG. You can Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased, while when the swing angle is large (see FIG. 59), It is possible to increase the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 in a non-linear manner (more than elastic change) and obtain a sufficient biasing force to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width has been described, but the tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 3640. 3641 is provided with an inclined side surface 3641a that is inclined in such a manner that the side surface of the torsion spring 650 that abuts against the tip end portion of the torsion spring 650 becomes wider toward the tip end side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 60A and FIG. 60B are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. Note that, in FIGS. 60A and 60B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 60A shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, and FIG. 60B shows the inverted state of FIG. 60A. The transmission member 3640 is shown in a state of being swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A), the main body portion 3641 is pressed against the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is moved. The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that swings in a direction of returning to the inverted state.

  When the transmission member 3640 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 60A to the state shown in FIG. 60B, the swing angle between the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 3640 changes. The contact position between the body portion 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the biasing arm portion 652 (the tip position of the biasing arm portion 652) is changed by the swing of the transmission member 3640. That is, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A) becomes larger, the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 is closer to the tip end side of the main body portion 3641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643). ) Is moved to.

  Therefore, the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641a of the main body portion 3641. That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 is deformed by the swinging angle of the transmission member 3640 and also by the width of the transmission member 3640 being enlarged by the inclined side surface 3641 a. .. In this case, the width of the transmission member 3640 becomes wider toward the tip of the transmission member 3640. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A) becomes larger, the inclined side surface 3641a becomes larger. As a result, the deformation of the torsion spring 650 due to the increased width of the transmission member 3640 is increased. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 increases, the increasing rate of the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (change in biasing force of the torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 3640) can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, a tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described. However, in the tilting operation unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment, the transmission member 4640 adds the contact portion 644 to the contact portion 644 thereof. A moving contact member 4647 having a width smaller than that of the portion 644 is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  61A is a rear perspective view of the transmission member 4640 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61B is a rear perspective view of the moving contact member 4647. It should be noted that the illustration of the moving contact member 4647 is omitted in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the front arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645 a that are symmetrically arranged at intervals shorter than the arrangement interval of the contact portions 644 and are bored in the front-rear direction. Prepare The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of rear projections 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the moving contact member 4647 includes a main body portion 4647a formed in an elongated plate shape, and a pair of rear surface protrusions protruding from both end portions of the main body portion 4647a to the rear surface side. It mainly includes a portion 4647b and a front projection portion 4647c that is provided in a semi-spherical tip on the front side from substantially the center of the main body portion 4647.

  Note that one end of a coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front protrusion 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (Fig. 62 (c) and See FIG. 62 (d). Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring 4648 is not shown in FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), 62 (a) and 62 (b).

  The back protrusion 4647b is a portion that is inserted from the front side into the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640, and has a sufficient length from the front arc plate portion 4645 (abutment with the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650) at the time of insertion. It is formed in such a way that the (possible length) is projected. The back projection 4647b is formed so as to be inclined at an angle at which the bias arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 comes into contact with the surface (line) (see FIG. 64 (b)). As a result, the load applied to the biasing arm portion 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) as compared with the case where the biasing arm portion 652 and the back projection 4647b are in point contact, and the biasing arm portion 652 is provided. The durability of can be improved.

  The front projection portion 4647c is a portion that abuts on the main body member 4621 (see FIG. 63) of the effect member 4620, and the moving abutting member 4647 is provided in relation to the escape opening portion 4621a formed on the main body member 4621. It may be separated from the front arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62 (c)), or the moving contact member 4647 may be brought close to the front arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62 (d)). Since the tip of the front protrusion 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, the front protrusion 4647c can be easily mounted on the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

  62 (a) and 62 (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62 (c) and 62 (d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. 62 (a) and 62 (c), the state in which the moving contact member 4647 is separated from the front arc plate portion 4645 is different from that in FIG. 62 (b) and FIG. 62 (d). The state in which the 4647 is brought close to the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is shown respectively.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic front view schematically showing main body member 4621 of effect member 4620. It should be noted that the transmission member 4640 forming an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is the central state 4640C, the state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise as viewed from the front is the counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and the transmission member 4640 is the The state of being swung clockwise in the front view is shown as a clockwise swing state 4640R by imaginary lines. Further, in the center state 4640C, the counterclockwise swinging state 4640L, and the clockwise swinging state 4640R, illustration of the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 4645, and the back arc plate portion 646 is omitted for easy understanding. ..

  The main body member 4621 includes an escape opening 4621a formed in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the escape opening 4621a has a region (center state 4640C and counterclockwise oscillation) in which the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is pivoted counterclockwise as viewed from the front. (Moving state 4640L).

  When the front protrusion 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps with the escape opening 4621a when viewed from the front, the front protrusion 4647c is inserted into the escape opening 4621a and the moving contact member 4647 is transmitted by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648. Is separated from the main body 641 (see FIG. 62C). On the other hand, when the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap with the escape opening 4621a (overlaps with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c is brought into contact with the side surface of the effect member 4620 on the back side of the main body member 4621 and the moving contact member. 4647 is brought close to the main body 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62D).

  That is, the rear projection 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 is extended to a position where it can contact the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the inverted state when viewed from the front. Be done. Therefore, the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the inverted state when viewed from the front, compared to when it is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The increasing rate of the biasing force (the degree of increase of the biasing force with respect to the swing angle) can be increased.

  64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. 64A and 64B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are shown by imaginary lines, and the main body portion 4647a of the moving contact member 4647a is illustrated for easy understanding. Illustration is omitted. Further, FIG. 64 (a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 64 (b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 64 (a). The transmission member 4640 is oscillated by a predetermined amount clockwise in the front view, and the biasing arm 652 on the left side in the front view is brought into contact with the rear projection 4647b.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), while the swing angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, it is possible to contact the biasing arm portion 652 from the opposite side (contact portion 644 side) of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640. By doing so, the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in the front view can be increased.

  Thus, the urging force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise in the front view is improved while the starting speed when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view is increased. You can Therefore, it is possible to suppress the effect member 4620 from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210.

  That is, when the tilting operation unit 4600 is placed in the retracted position and the effect member 4620 is in the inverted state, the inner surface of the rear case 210 comes close to the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, when the effect member 4620 is swung vigorously toward the inverted state from the state where the effect member 4620 is swung counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 57), the effect member 4620 cannot be decelerated completely and the rear case 210. The effect member 4620 may collide with the inner surface of the.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear projection 4647b is projected at the timing when the effect member 4620 is swung clockwise from the inverted state (see FIG. 62D), and the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is applied. Can be increased. Accordingly, when the effect member 4620 is tilted clockwise from the inverted state in the front view while maintaining a high operation speed when the effect member 4620 is tilted counterclockwise from the inverted state in the front view, the effect member 4620 is sufficient. Can be slowed down.

  In addition, a direction in which the rear projection 4647b is pushed back at the contact point between the rear projection 4647b and the biasing arm 652 arranged on the side opposite to the swinging direction of the transmission member 4640 (FIG. 64 (b), front view counterclockwise). ) Will generate an urging force. As a result, as compared with the case where the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 (the right side in FIG. 64 (b)), the transmission member 4640 is pushed with a larger biasing force. Can be pushed back. On the other hand, the biasing force generated by the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 can be improved.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the contact portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side opposite to the side close to the transmission member 4640 come into contact with each other to the lower receiving plate portion 614a. The distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is shorter than that of the above. In this case, it is easy to move the bent portion 653a by the force from the contact portion 644 with the lower receiving plate portion 614 as the fulcrum, but the opposite is difficult (the distance from the fulcrum to the action point is different. Because).

  Therefore, the urging force generated by the deformation of the urging arm 652 on the left side in front view caused by the contact between the contact portion 644 and the urging arm 652 is generated by the deformation of the entire torsion spring 650. That is, the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side in front view and the rear projection 4647b are brought into contact with each other, and the bent portion 653a on the left side in front view is leftward in front view (inner diameter of the coil portion 651) with the lower receiving plate 641a as a fulcrum. Is deformed in the direction of narrowing (i.e., in the direction of narrowing) the deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the biasing arm portion 652 on the right side in front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 is deformed by reducing the inner diameter, a biasing force is generated in the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 toward the side that increases the inner diameter of the coil portion 651, and the right side in the front view (transmission member). The urging force of the urging arm portion 652 (on the side of the rocking direction of 4640) that pushes back the transmission member 640 can be improved.

  Next, the combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68.

  In the first embodiment, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the projecting position, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. However, the rotating arm member 5550 according to the fifth embodiment includes the recessed portion 5556 in which the non-transmission wall portion 5553c is recessed in the direction away from the rotating crank member 570. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  65 to 68 are front views of the combined operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 65, the state in which the rotating arm member 5550 is arranged at the extended position and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged near the left end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is shown in FIG. Then, from the state of FIG. 65, the state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. However, in FIG. 67, the state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 66 to the position where the sliding protrusion 574 is disengaged from the recessed portion 5556 is shown in FIG. From the state, the state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the two-sided recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is illustrated respectively. It

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c of the combined operation unit 5550 includes a recessed portion 5556 recessed in a direction away from the rotary crank member 570.

  The recessed portion 5556 has a first wall portion 5556a having an arc shape (about 1/4 of a circular shape) formed on the left side in front view, and an arc shape (about 1/4 of a circular shape) formed on the right side in front view. The second wall portion 5556b and the second wall portion 5556b are mainly provided and are configured to allow the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 to slide. That is, the depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is equal to or less than the radius of the sliding protrusion 574, and the connection portion of the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is smooth. It is formed from a curved surface.

  When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 65, a gap is generated between the sliding protrusion 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, The rotating arm member 5550 is rocked by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a until it abuts on the sliding protrusion 574. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c rotates while sliding on the sliding protrusion portion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517 a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are rotated. The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding protrusion 574 causes the first recess from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c. It is pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the installation portion 5556, and the rotating arm member 5550 is again swung (pushed down) to the extended position. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, since the second wall portion 5556b is pushed and moved by the sliding protrusion portion 574, the rotating arm member 5550 swings, The driving force of the second drive device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570.

  Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are rotated. The crank member 570 forms a transmission state.

  When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, a gap is generated between the sliding protrusion 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, The rotating arm member 5550 is rocked by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a until it abuts on the sliding protrusion 574. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the second recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding protrusion portion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517 a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are rotated. The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  As shown in FIG. 65 to FIG. 68, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall 5556a, When the non-transmission state is formed between the dynamic crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 5550, and the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member. A transmission state is formed with 5550.

  If the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 are provided. When the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall 5556b, a non-transmission state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550. It

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in the present embodiment, the rotation arm member 5550 is set between the retracted position (see FIG. 22) and the extended position without switching the swing direction of the rotation crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion of swinging between, the swinging arm member 5550 has a small width in the vicinity of the extended position (a lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between the positions U1 and U2). A rocking motion that is rocked can be formed.

  This makes it possible to cause the swing arm member 5550 to perform a swinging motion that is difficult to form by switching the drive direction of the drive device 560. That is, it is possible to form the swing arm member 5550 to perform a swinging motion with a small width in the vicinity of the extended position by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the swing motion depends on the switching speed of the drive device 560 in the drive direction. Further, even if the drive direction of the drive device 560 is switched in a state in which the swinging speed of the rotary arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the drive device 560 and the rotary arm member 5550 is large and the drive direction cannot be switched instantaneously. However, there is a possibility that the time required for switching the driving direction becomes long.

  On the other hand, in the swinging operation of the rotating arm member 5550 in the vicinity of the extended position in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, so that the time required for switching the driving direction is unnecessary. can do.

  In addition, the operation speed of the operation in which the rotating arm member 5550 is swung clockwise in the front view (upward swinging operation) depends on the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a, and the rotating arm member 5550 is not seen in the front view. The operation speed of the clockwise swing operation (downward swing operation) depends on the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, by increasing the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570, the swing speed of the rotating arm member 5550 near the extended position can be increased.

  As a result, it is possible to achieve both high-speed swing motion near the extended position of the rotary arm member 5550 and reduction of the swing direction switching time.

  Next, the combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary arm member 550 of the combined operation unit 500 is integrally molded has been described, but the rotary arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting two members. .. By the relative swinging of the two members, the attitude of the arcuate hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  69 (a) and 69 (c) are partial front views of the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 69 (b) is a rotating view in the direction of arrow LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). It is a partial top view of arm member 6550. Note that FIG. 69 (a) illustrates a state in which the tip posture of the tip swing member 6556 is formed in the first posture, and in FIG. 69 (b), the tip of the tip swing member 6556 moves downward. The state in which the second oriented posture is formed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 69A, the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to the main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end portion of the main body portion 6551. A tip swinging member 6556 and a switching device 6590 fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the main body portion 6551 to switch the posture of the tip swinging member 6556 are mainly provided. An arcuate hole 6554 is formed in the tip swing member 6556.

  The main body portion 6551 includes a shaft support hole 6551a which is formed in the other end portion in the front-rear direction and serves as a swing center of the tip swing member 6556.

  The tip swing member 6556 is formed in such a manner that the end portion on the side connected to the body portion 6551 sandwiches the body portion 6551 in the front and back, and a shaft support hole 6556a formed as a swing center of the tip swing member 6556. A shaft support rod 6556b, which is a rod member inserted through the shaft support hole 6556a and the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip swing member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arc-shaped hole 6554. The sliding shaft 6556c is mainly provided so as to project in the front-rear direction from the end of the section and is connected to the guide elongated hole 6591d of the switching device 6590.

  The arcuate hole 6554 includes a return portion 6554a that is provided so as to project on the inner surface on the upper side. The return portion 6554a is a portion that slides on the protruding portion 541b of the expansion and contraction effecting member 6540. When sliding from the tip side of the arcuate hole 6554, resistance is suppressed, while sliding in the opposite direction. It is a laterally asymmetrical projection that increases sliding resistance when moved.

  70 (a) and 70 (b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a pushed-up state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a pushed-down state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down with respect to the switch member 6592. Is illustrated. Further, the pushed-up state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (a).

  The C-shaped member 6591 has a long plate-shaped main body 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which the movable columnar portion 6592a can be inserted is formed, and an inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the hole formed in the main body 6591a. A cylindrical guide portion 6591b having a cylindrical shape and a groove formed on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and a main body portion 6591a extending downward from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6591a. It mainly includes a pair of arm portions 6591c and a guide elongated hole 6591d that is a long hole that is formed on the distal end side of the arm portion 6591c and that guides the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swing member 6556.

  The grooving formed on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular guide portion 6591b is grooving for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the moving columnar portion 6592a of the switch member 6592. Due to the groove processing, the C-shaped member 6591 is switched between a pushed-up state and a pushed-down state each time the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed in the direction in which it is pushed by the switch member 6592. In addition, illustration of other members such as a spring member that forms a biasing force necessary for forming the knock mechanism is omitted, and in the present embodiment, the tubular guide portion 6591b is the push-in portion 6541a of the expansion and contraction rendering device 6540 (see FIG. 71 (see 71).

  The switch member 6592 includes a movable columnar portion 6592a having a protrusion that is inserted from the cylindrical guide portion 6591a and is movable in a groove on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591a from the outer peripheral surface, and the movable cylindrical portion 6592a is an axis. A fixed plate portion 6592b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 is mainly provided.

  Here, in the knock mechanism, the relative position in the axial direction is switched while the tubular member and the columnar member guided on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member are relatively rotated. That is, when the tubular member and the columnar member do not rotate relative to each other, it becomes difficult to switch the relative position in the axial direction.

  On the other hand, the movable columnar portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is axially rotatably connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved in the direction approaching the switch member 6592 (when it is pushed downward in FIG. 70 (a)), the movable columnar portion 6592a is relatively rotatable with respect to the tubular guide portion 6591b. Then, the knock mechanism works.

  Therefore, it is possible to switch between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state without relatively rotating the fixed plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591. Therefore, the state of the switching device 6590 can be switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state while maintaining the state in which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip end swinging member 6556 is inserted into the guide elongated hole 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591. it can.

  71A and 71B are front views of the combined operation unit 6500. In FIG. 71 (a), a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the extended position and the switching device 6590 is pushed up is shown, and in FIG. K4, the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the extended position and switched. The condition in which the device 6590 is depressed is shown. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged at a position swung to the left end of the swingable range.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the state of the switching device 6590 is switched in a state where the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the projecting position, whereby the front-view timepiece of the stretch effect producing device 540. The maximum swing angle around can be switched.

  That is, when the switching device 6590 forms a push-up state (see FIG. 71 (a)), the projection 541 b of the expansion / contraction effecting member 6540 is brought into contact with the inner side surface on the upper side of the arcuate hole 6554 to cause the expansion / contraction effecting device 6540 to move. The swing angle is limited.

  At this position, the inner side surface of the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as stoppers, and even if the swing speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged in the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (a). It can be stopped suddenly (the movement locus RI of the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the return portion 6554a).

  On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms the depressed state (see FIG. 71 (b)), the projection portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (of the projection portion 541b). The movement locus RI is not brought into contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the protrusion 541b is discharged to the outside from the tip portion 554a of the arc-shaped hole 6554.

  Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in the front view until the rotary plate 520 comes into contact with the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71 (b)). In this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and even when the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 swings at a high speed, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be suddenly stopped.

  Thereby, it is possible to form a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) in a case where the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in the front view and the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is suddenly stopped. The variation of can be increased. In addition, when switching the state of the switching device 6590, the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the tubular guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 moves from the upper right portion when viewed from the front of the main body member 6541a to the right. It is generated by being pushed by the pushing portion 6541a extending in one direction. Therefore, since the second drive device 560 that causes the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 to swing is also used as a drive device that swings the tip swing member 6556, it is possible to reduce the number of drive devices that are provided.

  71 (a) and 71 (b), the swing range of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swing member 6556. In this case, since the swing angle is small, it is possible for the player not to notice the change.

  Here, when the player can visually recognize the rotating arm member 6550 (see FIG. 71), if the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the rotating arm member 6550, Expectation for the operation of the stretch effect device 6540 is weakened, and the attention level of the stretch effect device 6540 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swinging angle of the tip swinging member 6556 for changing the swinging angle of the expansion / contraction producing device 6540 is small, which makes it difficult for the player to notice the change. it can. As a result, the sense of expectation for the operation of the stretch effect device 6540 can be increased, and the attention level of the stretch effect device 6540 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a tilting operation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the elongated hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is supported in the sliding hole 643 so as to be guided is described. In the tilting operation unit 7600 in the form, the shaft support hole 7643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 7600, and the effect member 620 is supported in the shaft support hole 7643. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  72A and 72B are front views of the tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment. 72 (a) shows an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7643 of the transmission member 7640 is arranged vertically above the tubular portion 642, and FIG. 72 (b) shows the inverted state in FIG. 72 (b). The state where the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is illustrated. 72 (a) and 72 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the back side thereof are visible. The torsion spring 650 and the shaft support projection 612 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the base member 7610 has a sliding hole 7613 that is formed in the front-rear direction below the second shaft support hole 614 of the main body 611 in the vertical direction. The sliding hole 7613 is a long hole through which the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the longitudinal direction of the long hole is formed along the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is slidably supported in the sliding hole 7613.

  The transmission member 7640 has a shaft support hole 7643 formed at the end opposite to the end where the tubular portion 642 of the main body 641 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a portion that pivotally supports the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is bored with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding shaft portion 621a.

  The swinging motion of the effect member 620 is caused by the transmission member 7640 swinging around the second shaft support hole 614 by the rotation of the drive motor 631 of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 51).

  In the present embodiment, since the sliding shaft portion 621a is axially supported by the shaft support hole 7643, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 follows the swing locus of the transmission member 7640. (The sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted into the sliding hole 7613, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610.

  Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72B, when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72 <transfer swing Moving angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung by the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631, the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 7640. Thereby, the accuracy of adjusting the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71 can be made smaller than that in the first embodiment. explain.

  The connecting line J1 illustrated in FIG. 72 (b) is a line drawn from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626. The virtual connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and when the swing shaft portion 626 is arranged above the sliding hole 7613 from a line drawn through the tubular portion 642 in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641. It is a line drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 72A). The virtual angle φ73, which is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2, is the same as that of the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the sliding hole 7613. This corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the effect swing angle φ72 is made smaller than the virtual angle φ73, and according to the tilting operation unit 7600 of the seventh embodiment, the effect when the transmission member 7640 is swung by a predetermined angle. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung by the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the swing amount of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 is adjusted. The accuracy of can be improved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front rail portion 715 is formed of a single arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed of a plurality of arcs and the directions of adjacent arcs may be reversed (corrugated). In this case, since the slide movement speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed and the posture of the effect member 620 is made unstable, it is possible to perform an effect in which the effect member 620 is rattled.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the effect member 620 forms the inverted state, the case where the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is vertically above the first shaft support portion 613 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity may be arranged obliquely above the first pivot portion 613.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the upper surface of the cushioning rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 is horizontal in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the outer side in the width direction. In this case, the velocity of the sphere flowing into the upper surface of the lower left plate member 320 from the outside in the width direction of the board can be decelerated by the acceleration in the gravity direction, and the deceleration time of the sphere can be shortened.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed of a long hole has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sliding hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the positional deviation between the sliding hole 643 and the sliding shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by expanding and contracting the transmission member 640. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the position of the contact portion 644 can be switched between two positions has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously variable (movable). In this case, the change rate of the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the posture of the tip swing member 6556 changes in two positions has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the attitude change of the tip swing member 6556 may be generated in multiple stages. In this case, the amount of swing of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 can be formed in a plurality of types, and the variation of production can be increased.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot several times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time title, a three-time title, and May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variation display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and finally displayed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific ".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls that are dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Example of technical idea of changing driving force transmission by the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550>
The crank member is provided with a protrusion protruding from a position that is rotated about the first shaft and is eccentric to the first shaft, and an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted. The crank member is separated from the first position and the first position. An arm member movably formed between the second position and a drive device for generating a driving force for rotating the crank member about the first shaft are provided, and the insertion portion is inserted. The drive force is transmitted to the arm member by contacting the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protrusion portion with the protrusion portion, and the arm member is moved to the first position and the second position. A gaming machine, comprising: a transmission area movably formed between the position and a non-transmission area connected to the transmission area, the transmission of the driving force being interrupted. A1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, provided with a crank member including a protrusion that is provided at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft, and an arm member including an insertion portion through which the protrusion of the crank member is inserted. There is a game machine in which an arm member operates in conjunction with rotation of a crank member (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-000306). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked. Therefore, the arm member is driven from the time of starting the crank member, and it is not possible to shift the timing of starting the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member. In this case, when the crank member is started, a large force that overcomes the inertia of the crank member and the arm member is required, which causes a problem that the drive device becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes the transmission area and the non-transmission area connected to the transmission area, the crank portion is inserted in the non-transmission area. By starting the member, it is possible to shift the timing of driving the arm member and the timing of starting the crank member. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission region from the non-transmission region. As a result, the driving force required at the time of starting the crank member can be suppressed, and the size of the driving device can be reduced.

  The arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves in the non-transmission area. For example, when the arm member is moved, the case where it is moved by gravity or elastic force generated by an elastic spring for assistance is exemplified.

  In addition, as the insertion portion, a recess having a bottomed concave shape, a penetrating elongated hole, or the like is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the crank member is formed so as to be able to rotate for one rotation or more, and the insertion portion serves as the transmission area by rotating the crank member in one rotation direction, while the crank member is A gaming machine A2, comprising: a selection area that becomes the non-transmission area by being rotated in another rotation direction that is opposite to the one rotation direction.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the crank member. As a result, even if the rotational speed of the crank member is not changed, it is possible to form two speed modes of the arm member when the crank members are arranged in the same phase by reversing the direction of the driving force of the drive device. Therefore, the speed variation of the arm member can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the protrusion and an inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion that faces the moving direction of the protrusion when the crank member is rotated in the one rotation direction. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the selection area is formed by providing a spare portion.

  In addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 has the insertion area formed by the insertion portion having the allowance portion, so that it is possible to change the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member. The member can be eliminated and the material cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position and the second position is formed as an end position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the end position formed as the end position. When the arm member is arranged at either one of the second positions, the arm member is formed as the terminal position and is directed toward the other side opposite to either the first position or the second position. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that a bounce suppressing mechanism for suppressing movement is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, when the arm member is arranged at either one of the first position and the second position formed as the end position of the movable range of the arm member, It is possible to suppress the driving force that the drive device needs to generate in order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other side on the opposite side. Therefore, the durability of the drive device can be improved.

  As the bounce restraint mechanism, when the attractive force of the magnet is used, when the movement is restrained by a claw-shaped member, and when the load received by the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member, An example is a case where a member insertion portion is formed.

  When attracting with a magnet, the magnet is required as a separate member, but it is possible to generate attractive forces of various sizes depending on the internal composition of the magnet, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

  When the claw-shaped member restrains the movement, a drive device for operating the claw-shaped member is necessary, but the claw-shaped member can mechanically stop the movement of the arm member.

  When the insertion portion of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received by the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed toward the axis of the crank member, it is not necessary to dispose another member for suppressing movement of the arm member, Bounce of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the arm member is disposed at at least one of the first position and the second position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission region of the non-transmission region is A game machine A5 in which the bounce restraint mechanism is formed by being substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centering on the rotation axis of the crank member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is arranged at the first position or the second position. As a result, the change from the moving state of the arm member to the stopped state can be smoothly formed.

  Further, in the bounce restraint mechanism, the load applied from the insertion portion to the protrusion is directed to the rotation axis of the crank member, so that the load can be restrained in the rotation direction of the crank member and the burden on the drive device can be restrained. can do.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission region of the non-transmission region is the crank member. The circumscribed circle of the protrusion centering on the rotation axis is substantially the same, a biasing force for moving the arm member from the first position to the second position is applied, and the non-transmission area of the insertion part is At least one of an inner recessed portion protruding inside the insertion portion or an outer recessed portion protruding outside the insertion portion is formed in a size capable of accommodating the protrusion portion on the side surface on the first position side. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission area of the non-transmission area Is approximately the same as the circumscribing circle of the protrusion around the rotation axis of the crank member, and the biasing force that moves the arm member from the first position to the second position is applied to the arm member. In this case, the protrusion of the crank member is arranged in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, so that the movement of the arm member is prevented by the protrusion and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved in the non-transmission region so that the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess face each other, the arm member is moved. That is, when the protrusion is arranged to face the inner recess, the inner recess is pushed out by the protrusion and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. When the protrusion is arranged to face the outer recess, the protrusion is housed in the outer recess and the arm member is moved to the crank member side.

  As a result, the protrusion of the crank member moves in the non-transmission region, and the movement of the arm member has a different movement width from the movement of the arm member that occurs when the protrusion moves in the transmission region due to rotation of the crank member. Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving device and change the movement width of the arm member at the same time.

  That is, in order to change the movement width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the drive device according to the movement width of the arm member. In this case, the control load on the drive device increases, and it is difficult to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, the protrusion of the crank member is moved in the non-transmission area and the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, whereby movements of the arm members having different movement widths are formed. It Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. In addition, by narrowing the formation interval of the adjacent inner recesses or outer recesses, it is possible to cause the arm member to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

  The mode in which the protrusion can be accommodated may be a mode in which the entire protrusion is included in the recess, or a part in which the protrusion is included in the recess.

<An example of a technical idea of limiting the swing width of the expansion / contraction producing device 540 with the arcuate hole 554>
A movable member that can be moved along a predetermined movement locus and that can be arranged at mutually different first and second positions, and the movable member that moves in correspondence with the movable member and abuts on the movable member. A stopper member that restricts the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second position. And a gaming machine B1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes a movable member that is movably formed and a stopper member that limits a moving width of the movable member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the stopper member is fixed immovably, so that the stopper member is separately prepared when the movable member is arranged at the first position and when it is arranged at the second position. However, there is a problem that the space for disposing the stopper member becomes wide.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the stopper member moves corresponding to the movable member, the stopper member when the movable member is arranged in the first position is arranged in the second position. In this case, it can also be used as a stopper member. Thereby, the space for disposing the stopper member can be suppressed.

  Further, the stopper member changes the moving width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second member, so that the variation of the moving width of the movable member is increased. be able to.

  Examples of the stopper member include a projection portion that is provided so as to project from the transmission member and is brought into contact with the movable member, an inner wall portion of a recess that is provided in the transmission member and that houses a part of the movable member, and the like.

  Note that examples of the movement mode include linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, swinging, and rotational movement. In addition, the movement width in each mode of movement means, for example, an actual movement distance or a straight distance between two points in the case of linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, etc. In the case of etc., it means an actual moving distance, a moving angle, or the like.

  In the gaming machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is swingably supported by a first shaft and that expands and contracts in a radial direction of the first shaft, and the first position and the second position are different from each other. In the case where the intermediate member has different expansion and contraction lengths, the predetermined movement locus is formed in an arc shape with the first axis as a center, and the stopper member is in a case where the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion and contraction state. A gaming machine B2, wherein the movable member is extended along the predetermined movement locus.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the movable member is pivotally supported about the first shaft and is formed so as to be capable of expanding and contracting in the radial direction of the first shaft. It has a member. Therefore, the radius of curvature of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member about the first axis can be changed depending on the length of the intermediate member in the expansion / contraction direction.

  Here, the stopper member is extended along a predetermined movement locus of the movable member when the intermediate member is in the predetermined expanded / contracted state (the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member in the predetermined expanded / contracted state). And the curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member is the same). In this case, the movable member is moved along the stopper member and the movable member can be moved in the extending direction of the stopper member when the intermediate member is expanded and contracted to a predetermined state. Therefore, the moving width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

  On the other hand, when the intermediate member is set in a stretched state different from the predetermined stretched state, the curvature of the predetermined moving path of the movable member and the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member can be made different, and the predetermined movement of the movable member can be made. The locus and the extending direction of the stopper member can intersect. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be changed by changing the expansion / contraction state of the intermediate member.

  In the gaming machine B2, the movable member includes a protrusion that projects toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted, and the protrusion is in the insertion portion. The gaming machine B3, wherein the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with each other in the expansion and contraction direction of the intermediate member in the inserted state, and the movable member is brought into contact with the insertion portion.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with the expansion and contraction direction of the intermediate member by inserting the protrusion of the movable member into the insertion portion of the stopper member. The drive device for expanding and contracting the movable member and the drive device for moving the stopper member can be combined. Further, the insertion portion regulates the movement of the movable member by being brought into contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper for restricting the movement of the movable member and a function for interlocking the movable member and the stopper member. As a result, the functions can be integrated.

  In the gaming machine B3, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side due to the expansion and contraction operation of the intermediate member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the expansion and contraction operation of the intermediate member reverses the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side. Accordingly, the moving width of the movable member can be changed depending on whether the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion part or when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion part.

  That is, when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement trajectory of the protrusion when the movable member moves along a predetermined movement trajectory follows the shape of the insertion portion), The movement locus and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the projection portion when the movable member is moved along a predetermined movement locus is substantially the reverse of the shape of the insertion portion), the projection portion The angle formed by the locus of movement of the movable member and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion is increased, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so that its posture can be changed while maintaining the stretchable state of the intermediate member, and the posture of the insertion portion changes so that the contact position between the movable member and the insertion portion. The game machine B5 is characterized in that the movement width of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the contact position between the movable member and the inserting portion is changed by changing the posture of the inserting portion while maintaining the stretchable state of the intermediate member. In this case, the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion includes a groove portion that allows the protrusion portion to move in and out along the movement trajectory, and the protrusion portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion. A gaming machine B6, which is capable of forming a state, and in which the movable member includes a positioning assisting portion that is engaged with the stopper member in the separated state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the protruding portion can be formed in a separated state in which the protruding portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion, and the movable member is in the separated state. A positioning assisting portion that engages with the stopper member is provided. Therefore, the formation range of the stopper member can be made smaller than the operating range of the movable member, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the positional deviation between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be achieved. Can be prevented. That is, even if the protruding portion is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member is suppressed by the positioning assisting portion, so that the protrusion portion can be returned to the insertion portion again.

<An example of a technical idea of supporting the production member 620 supported upside down by two points>
A base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member and moves upward from a predetermined position, a drive device that generates a driving force for displacing the movable member, and the movable member. And a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated from the drive device to the movable member, the transmission member is pivotally supported by a shaft support portion formed on the base member, The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the length from the shaft supporting portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the supporting portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmitting member. ..

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that drives a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on a base member and that moves upward from a predetermined position by transmission of driving force by a gear (for example, (See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when operating the driving device in the minimum unit of resolution of control of the driving device (for example, one step in a stepping motor) is the supporting portion of the movable member. To the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the movable member as the center of gravity of the movable member moves away from the support portion in the radial direction.

  Further, when the center of gravity of the movable member shifts to one side from the inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion, a driving force for displacing the movable member in the opposite direction is generated to invert the movable member. Even if an attempt is made to maintain the state, if the center of gravity shifts to the other side due to the driving force, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity coincide, and the movable member is largely displaced.

  Therefore, as the movable member becomes longer in the radial direction of the support portion, there is a problem that it becomes more difficult to stop the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the drive device to the movable member to move the movable member upward is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion of the base member and is coupled to the movable member. The length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the shaft supporting portion is formed shorter than the length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the supporting portion. Therefore, even if the movable member is long in the radial direction of the support portion, it is possible to suppress the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when operating the drive device in the minimum unit of control resolution of the drive device. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the movable member stand still in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

  The manner in which the movable member is supported by the base member includes a manner in which the movable member is pivotally supported by the base member, a manner in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, and A combined mode and the like are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission member has a shorter arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, as the movable member displaced around the support portion moves upward from the predetermined position, the transmission member from the pivotal support portion to the connecting position with the movable member is moved. Arm length is reduced. Therefore, compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved.

  For example, when the driving device that rotates the transmission member operates at a constant number of rotations, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is the first length. The description will be made assuming that the second length is shorter than the second length. When the number of rotations of the drive device is constant, the case where the transmission member is fixed at the first length is longer than the case where the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at the second length. The moving speed of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes faster when the members are arranged in a predetermined phase.

  Here, in the vicinity of a predetermined position, the movable member is quickly operated at the speed generated when the transmission member has the first arm length, and in the vicinity of the inverted state, the speed generated when the transmission member has the second arm length. Consider the case where you want to move the movable member slowly. As a method therefor, a method of changing the rotation speed of the drive device on the way can be considered, but it cannot be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotation speed of the drive device. Further, even if the rotation speed of the drive device can be changed, in order to change the rotation speed midway, a detection sensor for detecting the timing of the change is required, which causes a problem of high cost. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the arm length from the pivotally supported portion of the transmission member that is pivotally supported to the coupling position between the transmission member and the movable member is such that the transmission member has a predetermined position. It is formed in such a manner that it is shortened as it moves upward from. Therefore, the transmission member can have the first arm length near the predetermined position, and the transmission member can have the second arm length near the inverted position, so that the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. ..

  An example of a configuration in which the arm length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the transmission member and the movable member is fixed is a case where a protrusion protruding from the transmission member is inserted into the movable member and connected. It Further, as a configuration in which the arm length can be changed, a long hole is formed in the transmission member, and a protrusion protruding from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member, or the movable member is movable. An example is a case where the member is provided with a long hole in a portion supported by the support portion and an insertion shaft rod that is inserted into the long hole is formed from the base member.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the movable member is provided with a protrusion that protrudes in a direction parallel to the support portion, and the transmission member is an elongated hole that extends in the radial direction of the shaft support portion. A gaming machine C3, characterized in that the gaming machine C3 is provided with an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted.

  In the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion is extended in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the projection portion of the transmission member is inserted into the insertion portion so that the transmission member and the movable member are formed. Are coupled, the movement direction of the coupling position is limited to the radial direction of the shaft support portion. Therefore, along with the swing of the transmission arm, the length from the shaft supporting portion to the connecting position of the transmission member with the movable member can be mechanically changed.

  Examples of the insertion portion include a long hole that is formed through and a recessed portion that is formed as a bottomed recess.

  In the gaming machine C3, the pivotal support portion is disposed vertically above the support portion, and the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed on a straight line connecting the support portion and the protrusion portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, when the movable member takes a posture of arranging the protruding portion vertically above the supporting portion, the centers of gravity of the supporting portion, the shaft support portion, the protruding portion, and the movable member are It is formed on the vertical line. In this case, the gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is vertically downwardly applied to the support portion and the shaft support portion. Therefore, since the force in the rotational direction is not applied to the movable member, the posture of the movable member can be maintained even if the power of the drive device is shut off. As a result, the load on the drive device can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is provided between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is decelerated by the worm gear.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is provided between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is decelerated by the worm gear, so that the drive device is controlled. It is possible to significantly reduce the moving width of the movable member when operating in the minimum unit of resolution. In addition, since the force transmission direction through the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive unit side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to the load from the transmission member side, and the drive unit It is possible to reduce the load on the drive device when the drive is stopped.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a biasing device that generates a biasing force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member is provided. The gaming machine C6, wherein the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the displacement direction in an inverted state in which the movable member is disposed vertically above the support portion, and the displacement increases as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the urging device generates an urging force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion, and the urging force is the center of gravity of the movable member. It becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the state (inverted state) arranged vertically above the support portion. That is, the urging force can be minimized in the inverted state.

  Therefore, by increasing the biasing force when the movable member is moved upward from the predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive device that moves the movable member upward from the state in which the movable member is arranged at the predetermined position.

  Further, the urging force is generated bidirectionally in the displacement direction of the movable member, and balances in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved upward from the predetermined position and the drive device is stopped and controlled, the posture of the movable member is inverted due to the urging force even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes the inverted state. Can be sent to. Thereby, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in the inverted state.

  In the gaming machine C6, the movable member is capable of forming a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced from above the supporting portion in the vertical direction by a predetermined amount, and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by the predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine C7, wherein the second state has a larger change rate of the biasing force when the displacement is the same as compared with the one state.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the movable member is larger than the predetermined amount from the inverted state than the first state on the inverted state side in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support portion. In the displaced second state, the change rate of the biasing force when the displacement is the same becomes larger. In this case, when starting the movable member from the state in which the movable member is arranged in the second state, it is possible to suppress the load at the time of starting the drive device. Further, since the acceleration of the movable member when the movable member is arranged near the inverted state can be reduced, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in the inverted state.

<One example of technical idea in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during the swing>
A movable member that is movable between the first position and the second position, a drive device that generates a driving force that moves the movable member, and a biasing force that returns the movable member to the first position. In a gaming machine including an urging device for generating the movable member, the movable member is movable with respect to a change ratio of the urging force generated when the movable member is arranged in the first urging region from the first position to a predetermined position. A large change rate of the biasing force is generated when the member is arranged in the second biasing region that is formed to be separated from the first position and is a region that is connected to the first biasing region. A gaming machine D1 characterized by the above.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that uses an urging force of an urging device such as an elastic spring as an assisting force when the movable member is moved by a driving force generated by a driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011). (See JP-A-120640). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the urging force of the urging device is proportionally increased by the displacement amount of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the urging device by disposing the movable member. There was a problem that was. That is, it is difficult to make the movement of the movable member supple by suppressing the urging force in a certain area, and to increase the urging force to make the movement of the movable member abrupt in another area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the change rate of the biasing force biased toward the first position is greater than that when the movable member is arranged in the first biasing region. It is made larger when it is arranged in the active area. That is, for example, when the movable member stopped at the second position is started toward the first position (second urging region), sufficient urging force can be obtained by the urging device, while the movable member moves to the first position. When the movable member is arranged in the urging region, the change of the urging force is suppressed and the operation of the movable member can be made supple (gradually).

  As a mode in which the change rate of the urging force of the urging device is changed by the arrangement of the movable member, when the number of the urging devices that generate the urging amount in the movable member is increased or the urging device is An example is a case where the elastic spring is formed of an elastic spring and the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed by the arrangement of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine D1, the urging device is a pair of long members that are respectively arranged on a pair of surfaces that intersect the moving direction of the movable member and sandwich the movable member in the moving direction, and one end thereof. Parts are arranged opposite to each other on both sides of the movable member, and the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end, is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is A main body portion sandwiched between a pair of long members, and at least one of the pair of long members formed on the opposite side of the main body portion with respect to the pair of long members and in the moving direction of the main body portion. An abutting portion formed so as to be capable of contacting, the abutting portion being coupled and fixed to the movable member, and the movable member being disposed in the first urging region, the movable member is Of the long members of the Is contacted with one of the long members on the side closer to the movable member and is given an urging force. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being provided.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the change in the rate of change of the biasing force by the biasing device is shifted for the contact of the movable member and the pair of elongated members for each elongated member. It can be formed by that. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the urging force of the urging device by control or to prepare another member for improving the urging force.

  That is, since the other ends of the pair of long members are restricted from moving, one long member on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moves, The other elongated member on the opposite side receives no force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first biasing region, when the movable member moves, the other long member arranged on the opposite side of the moving direction of the movable member stays in place.

  On the other hand, in the second urging region, the movable member is moved so that the other elongated member is brought into contact with the contact portion. As a result, the biasing force is also generated from the other long member. Therefore, the biasing force applied to the movable member in the second biasing region can be increased.

  Examples of the elastic spring include a coil spring, a torsion spring, a leaf spring and the like.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging device is a pair of long members that are respectively arranged on a pair of surfaces that intersect the moving direction of the movable member and sandwich the movable member in the moving direction. End portions of the movable member are arranged opposite to each other on both side surfaces of the movable member, and the other end portion opposite to the one end portion is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed. A body portion sandwiched between the pair of elongated members, and at least one of the pair of elongated members formed on the opposite side of the body portion with respect to the pair of elongated members and in the moving direction of the body portion. And an abutting portion formed so as to be able to abut, the abutting portion being coupled and fixed to the movable member, and the movable member being arranged in the first urging region, the movable member, The movable member of the pair of long members When the movable member is brought into contact with one of the long members on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement and is given a biasing force, and the movable member is arranged in the second biasing region, the one long member is moved. The game machine D3 is characterized in that an intermediate portion of the above is pressed against an abutting portion arranged on the side of one of the elongated members with respect to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the change in the change rate of the biasing force is formed by pressing the intermediate portion of one of the long members against the contact portion. That is, one elongate member that has already been deformed by the movement of the movable member is further deformed with the intermediate portion pressed against the contact portion as the starting point, so that the change rate of the biasing force changes. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subjected to the deformation becomes shorter than the deformation starting from the other end, so that the rate of change of the urging force with respect to the moving amount of the movable member is Increase. Thereby, in the second biasing region, it is possible to increase the change in the biasing force with respect to the moving amount of the movable member. Therefore, the change rate of the biasing force can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D3, the one long member includes a first bending point that is bent toward the abutting portion side which is arranged to face each other, and the one long member is at the first bending point. A game machine D4, which is pressed against the contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, one long member is brought into contact with the abutting portion which is arranged to face each other at the first bending point, so that one long member is brought into contact. It is stretched by the contact with the section. Therefore, the tip end portion of the biasing device that applies the biasing force to the movable member can be separated from the other end of the long member that is the starting point of the biasing force or the first bending point. Therefore, the moment that the movable member is loaded from the biasing device in the second biasing region can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D4, the movable member includes a tip enlarged region that is enlarged in the moving direction as it moves away from the other end of the elongated member, and one of the movable member and the elongated member is in the tip enlarged region. A gaming machine D5, which is abutted against the end of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged region, and the movable member and one end of the elongated member are in contact with each other in the tip enlarged region. Therefore, when one elongate member is extended by pressing one elongate member against the contact portion, the contact position between the movable member and the elongate member separates from the other end of the elongate member. And the amount of deformation of the long member is increased. Therefore, the urging force applied from the urging device to the movable member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed, and the gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, it is possible to increase the variation of the change in the biasing force generated by the long member. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the biasing force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<Example of technical idea in which buffer ribs 322 are formed on the lower plate 320 by providing a plurality of outlets>
Inside the game area in which the ball can be flowed down, the in-board accessory placed in contact with the lower edge of the game area and the ball formed on one side of the board in the width direction A first outlet which is an opening for discharging from the area, and a second outlet which is an opening for discharging a ball from the game area, which is formed on the other side in the width direction of the board accessory which is the opposite side to the one side in the width direction. In the gaming machine provided with, the first out opening and the second out opening include a lower plate portion that extends from the lower side surface of the opening to the front surface and has a guide surface on the upper surface, and the guide of the lower plate portion. The surface includes a buffer rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the corresponding side of the first out opening or the second out opening, and is formed by being raised from the guide surface on the outer side in the width direction. The cushion ribs so that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs is directed outward in the width direction. Gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is formed smaller.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of outlets are provided (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-192301). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is preferable to suppress the size of each out port as the number of out ports increases, because it is possible to secure the installation space for attackers and the like, while the out port is too small, There was a problem that the discharge of game balls might be delayed.

  For example, if the height at which the ball bounces up and down on the front side of the outlet is equal to or greater than the vertical width of the outlet, the ball stays in front of the outlet. Further, for example, when the side surface is disposed on the side surface of the outlet in the width direction to form a wall, the sphere that flows into the front side of the outlet from the width direction collides with the side surface of the character and bounces back in the width direction. At this time, when the amount of bounce in the width direction becomes equal to or larger than the lateral width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the buffer rib is formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate portion, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the ball and to decelerate the ball. That is, when the sphere collides from the up and down direction, the cushioning rib flexes and deforms, and the cushioning rib serves as a cushion to suppress the rebound of the sphere. Further, when the balls collide from the left and right directions, the balls fit into the buffer ribs and are braked.

  Here, the cushioning rib extending in the opening direction is weak against the load from the left and right directions and may be damaged by the collision of the balls from the left and right directions.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the guide surface has the step portion on the outer side in the width direction, the ball flowing down from the left-right direction toward the buffer rib falls from the step portion onto the buffer rib. .. In this case, the vertical component of the direction of collision of the ball with the buffer rib can be increased, and damage to the buffer rib can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the stepped portion has a function of stopping the ball moving left and right on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the ball moving on the guide surface from bouncing beyond the lateral width of the outlet.

  Since the buffer ribs are formed higher toward the center of the game area in the width direction, it is possible to obtain a large rebound suppressing effect in the vicinity of the center of the game area in the width direction in which the flowing balls are easily concentrated. As a result, the ball can be smoothly discharged from the outlet. Further, by aligning the curve of the lower side of the game area with the lower surface of the buffer rib, it is possible to correct the position of the out port downward.

  Here, the higher the formation height of the buffer ribs, the greater the effect of suppressing the rebound of the sphere is because the amount of bending of the buffer ribs increases. That is, the larger the amount of bending of the buffer ribs is, the more the cushioning effect is exerted, and the rebound can be suppressed more easily. Therefore, it is preferable to keep the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs constant in the left-right direction (make the length in the vertical direction constant) for the effect of suppressing rebound.

  On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs is made constant (the length in the vertical direction is made constant), it is necessary to increase the formation height of the step portion, and the path of the ball to reach the step portion is also upward. Since it is necessary to arrange the game area, the game area is narrowed as a result, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer ribs is made smaller outside the width direction of the game area where the flowing down balls are less likely to concentrate, and the center of the game area in the width direction where the flowing down balls are likely to concentrate. Then, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer rib is increased. This makes it possible to improve the discharge efficiency of the balls and secure the game area at the same time.

  In addition, extending in the opening direction is not particularly limited, and means extending in the opening direction in a shape such as a linear shape, a corrugated shape, or a mountain shape.

  In the gaming machine E1, the guiding surface is provided with an outer sloping portion that descends and leans outward in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the guide surface has the outer inclined portion, so that the velocity of the sphere flowing into the guide face from the outer side in the width direction can be decelerated by gravitational acceleration. The deceleration time can be shortened.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a non-flowing-down area in which a ball cannot flow down is formed diagonally above at least one of the first out opening and the second out opening.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the downward flow of the ball flowing diagonally downward from the non-downflow area toward the guide surface is restricted, so the downward flow of the ball to the guide surface is achieved. The number of paths can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to narrow the rebounding direction of the falling ball. Thereby, the outer shape of at least one of the first out port and the second out port can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine E3, in the non-flow-down area, an opening / closing device arranged in the game area and capable of opening and closing to the front side is arranged above at least one of the first out opening and the second out opening. The gaming machine E4, which is formed on the front side of the opening / closing device.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the non-flow-down area is formed by the opening / closing device. Accordingly, the space generated by suppressing the opening dimension of the first out port or the second out port toward the non-flow-down region side can be used as the installation space for the opening / closing device.

  Further, the switchgear allows the ball flowing down in the front of the switchgear to flow down below the game area in the closed state, and moves the ball flowing down in front of the switchgear to the rear of the game area in the open state. It has the function of flowing down. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form the non-flow-down region as compared with the case where the balls flow irregularly due to collision with a nail or the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a gaming machine E5 characterized in that a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first out opening or the second out opening.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is provided with the direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the upper bottom surface of the first out opening or the second out opening. It is possible to suppress the resistance to the ball flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning the prize (or passing through the operating port), there is a condition that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow a ball to be won, and a value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that drives a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on a base member and that moves upward from a predetermined position by transmission of driving force by a gear (for example, Patent Document 1). 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-120640).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the operation of the movable member.
This technical idea is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the operation of the movable member is good.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 includes a base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member, and moves upward from a predetermined position, and the movable member. In a gaming machine including a driving device that generates a driving force to displace, and a transmission member that is connected to the movable member and that transmits the driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member, the transmission member is the base. Compared to the length from the supporting portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member, the shaft support portion formed on the member swingably supports the movable member and the transmission member. The length to the connecting position is short.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the transmission member extends from the shaft supporting portion to the connection position with the movable member as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Arm length is reduced.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the movable member includes a protrusion protruding in a direction parallel to the supporting portion, and the transmission member is the A long hole extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion is provided with an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the operation of the movable member can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the operation of the movable member can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the operation of the movable member can be stabilized.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board 65 1st variable winning a prize device (opening and closing device)
313 Movable performance member (in-board accessory)
314 1st out port 315 2nd out port 315a Guide rib (direction adjustment rib)
320 Lower left plate member (lower plate part)
322 Buffer rib 324 Step 330 Right lower plate member (lower plate)
332 cushioning rib 512 first shaft portion (first shaft)
540, 6540 Expansion / contraction production device (movable member)
541 Main body member (part of intermediate member)
544 Slide plate (part of intermediate member)
545 Slide rail (part of intermediate member)
541b Projection portion 541e Guide fastening portion (positioning assistance portion)
550, 5550, 6550 Rotating arm member (arm member, stopper member)
553 Deformed slot (insertion part)
553d Selection wall section (selection area)
554 Arc-shaped hole (insertion part)
554a Mouth (groove)
554b First stopper surface (part of insertion portion)
554c Second stopper surface (part of insertion part)
560 Second drive device (drive device)
570 Rotating crank member (crank member)
574 Sliding protrusion (projection)
610, 7610 Base member 613 First shaft support hole (support portion)
614 Second shaft support hole (shaft support)
620, 4620 Performance member (movable member)
621a Sliding shaft (projection)
630 First drive device (drive device)
640, 2640, 3640, 4640, 7640 Transmission member (transmission member, movable member)
641, 2641, 3641 Main body 643 Sliding hole (insertion part)
644 Contact part 650 Torsional spring (biasing device, elastic spring)
652 Biasing arm (long member)
653a Bent portion (first bending point)
3641a Inclined side surface (tip enlarged area)
5556 Recessed part (outer recess)
7613 Sliding hole (support part)
7643 Shaft support hole (insertion part)
D margin

Claims (3)

A base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member and moves upward from a predetermined position, a drive device that generates a driving force for displacing the movable member, and the movable member. And a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member,
The transmission member is pivotally supported by a shaft support portion formed on the base member so as to be swingable, and compared with a length from the support portion to a connection position of the movable member and the transmission member, the transmission member is A game machine characterized in that the movable member and the transmission member have a short length to a connecting position.   The game apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the transmission member has a shorter arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine.   The movable member includes a protrusion that protrudes in a direction parallel to the support portion, and the transmission member is a long hole that extends in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the protrusion is inserted therethrough. The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising an insertion portion.

Images